JP2022118259A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving taste.

SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes a game board in which a game area is formed. The game area includes a plurality of electric generator winning holes, and a plurality of through-gates provided corresponding to the respective electric generator winning holes. On the basis of events that game balls pass through the respective through-gate, support lotteries of whether or not to execute support of the respective electric generators provided at the respective electric generator winning holes are independently executed respectively. Furthermore, on the basis of the execution of the support lottery, a normal symbol variable display is started in each unit area of a generator display part. When a winning variable display of normal symbols is terminated in a second unit area, a short-time opening in which an opening time is relatively short is executed in a second electric generator and subsequently a long-time opening in which the opening time is relative long is executed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in a game area. In addition, when a game ball enters the start ball entry section, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and a picture is displayed on the display device provided in the game area. is started. Then, when the lottery is won, for example, a combination of specific symbols is displayed in a final stop, and the game state shifts to a specific game state. In the specific game state, for example, a variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, and game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2008-35977

Here, in the gaming machines such as the pachinko machines exemplified above, there is a demand for gaming machines capable of increasing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

The present invention
a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means for a predetermined game period based on a predetermined specific trigger;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first variable ball-entering means and a second variable ball-entering means are provided as the variable ball-entering means,
The variable ball entry control means is
selection means for selecting one of the variable ball entry means that executes the variable ball entry control during the game period;
When one of the variable ball-entering means is selected by the selecting means, the variable ball-entering means is selected during the game period, and the expected degree of ball-entering to the variable ball-entering means is The mode of the variable ball-entering means is determined such that after operating in a relatively low low-expectation mode, the variable ball-entering means operates in a high-expectation mode with a relatively high expectation of ball entry into the variable ball-entering means. It is characterized by comprising mode determining means.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, interest improvement can be aimed at.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, (b) an explanatory diagram of the accessory display unit. (a) Front view showing the first electric accessory and its surroundings, (b) Front view showing the second electric accessory and its surroundings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine; Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. Explanatory drawing for explaining various variable display time tables. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing winning processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing confirmation processing for holding notice. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a first electric duty handling process; The flowchart which shows a 1st normal figure fluctuation start process. 4 is a flowchart showing a first electrical opening/closing process; 4 is a flow chart showing a process for dealing with the out-of-sight display. 10 is a flowchart showing second electric duty handling processing; The flowchart which shows the 2nd normal pattern fluctuation|variation start process. 4 is a flowchart showing a second electrical opening/closing process; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for dealing with a third electric role; Timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. The flowchart which shows production|presentation control processing. 6 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. 4 is a flowchart showing open command handling processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a process for dealing with variable commands. Timing chart for explaining the relationship between the flow of the game and various effects. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode displayed on a display screen in various production|presentations. (a) A front view of a game board in the second embodiment, (b) a schematic cross-sectional view of a first variable winning device, (c) a schematic cross-sectional view of a second variable winning device. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. (a) Flowchart showing the first special figure fluctuation start process, (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining the first table. (a) A flowchart showing the second special figure fluctuation start process, (b-1) an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal table, (b-2) an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving table. 4 is a flowchart showing open/close execution command response processing; The front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. 5 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates or the like on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility.

The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is said that As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is considered movable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game machine body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the game machine body 12 cannot be opened. and has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 through which substantially the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21 . A display lamp portion 23 is provided above the window portion 21 as part of the various lamp portions. Further, on both left and right sides of the display lamp section 23, there are provided speaker sections 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 25a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 25, and a lower plate 26a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 26. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later. have a function. In addition, the lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a. Game balls put out from the putout device of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper tray 25a and the lower tray 26a through a passage forming unit 28 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

A firing handle 29 is provided on the front door frame 14 to the right of the lower tray 26a. By operating the shooting handle 29, a game ball is shot toward the game area from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 provided below the game area in the inner frame. In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 29, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 31 . A game board 33 having a game area formed on the front side is detachably attached to the resin base 31 . The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 32 of the resin base 31 .

The configuration of the game board 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). FIG. 4(a) is a front view of the game board 33. FIG.

An inner rail portion 34 and an outer rail portion 35 are attached to the surface of the game board 33 , and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35 . In addition, the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35 constitute a guide rail 36 for guiding game balls to the game area, and a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 when the player rotates the shooting handle 29. is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 36.

The guide rail 36 is formed on one side of the game area so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 29 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 36 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail 36 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 33 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 40, a first electronic winning port 41, a second electronic winning port 42, a third electronic winning port 43, a first through gate 51, a second through gate 52, and a third through gate. 53, a variable display unit 61, a character object display section 62, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 40 and the electric winning openings 41 to 43, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 33, and based on the detection result. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, ten game balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning hole 40 and the electric winning holes 41 to 43 .

Incidentally, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. The number of payouts may be different between the second electronic role winning slot 42 and the third electronic role winning slot 43 . Also, the payout number of the first electric role winning opening 41 may be smaller than the payout number of the second electric winning opening 42 and the third electric winning opening 43 .

In addition, an out port 63 is provided at the bottom of the game board 33, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 63.例文帳に追加The game board 33 is also provided with a large number of nails 64 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 63, the general winning port 40, each electric winning port 41 to 43, and each through gate 51 to 53. Entering a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

Each of the through gates 51 to 53 is fixed in a state in which a part thereof protrudes forward with respect to the board surface of the game board 33 . The projecting portion is provided with a ball passage portion through which a game ball can pass from above (upstream side) to below (downstream side). The ball passing portion penetrates in the vertical direction and is formed larger than the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing from above the game area passes through the ball passing portion and flows to the downstream side of the game area as it is.

Further, each of the through gates 51 to 53 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing portion. The detection sensor is connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the detection result of the detection sensor is output to the main control device.

The positional relationship between the through gates 51 to 53 is set so that the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 . Specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first through gate 51 is located at different positions, specifically the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, through which the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 swings in the horizontal direction. above and on the center line of both. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows through the area surrounded by the through gates 51 to 53, and the game ball flows down in the area (horizontal fluctuation of the game ball). can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

In addition, between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. A plurality of guide pegs 64a are provided to guide the game balls as shown. Each guide nail 64 a is arranged below the first through gate 51 . Each guide peg 64a is arranged side by side in the lateral direction with an interval smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is such that the game ball cannot pass between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. , is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

According to such a configuration, when a game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows downward as it is, it collides with the guide nail 64a and is repelled, and the game ball is pushed to either the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. be guided. This makes it easier for the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 .

In this case, which of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 the game ball collided with the guide nail 64a passes depends on the manner of collision between the game ball and the guide nail 64a. Therefore, which of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 passes is random.

Although the vertical relative positional relationship of the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is set to be the same, the configuration is not limited to this and, for example, they may be shifted in the vertical direction. However, from the point of view of randomness, it is better to set the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction to be the same.

Here, the frequency of game balls passing through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 via the first through gate 51 is configured to be higher than the frequency without the first through gate 51. ing. Specifically, the regulation nail 64b for regulating the flow of the game ball so as to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. is provided. The regulating nail 64b is provided on a path other than the path via the first through gate 51 among the flow-down paths of the game ball toward the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 . The interval between each regulation nail 64b is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to such a configuration, a game ball flowing through the flow-down path through the first through gate 51 flows down in the space formed by the through gates 51 to 53 and the nails 64a and 64b, and flows down through the second through gate 52 or the second through gate 52. 3 through gate 53 is easy to pass through. On the other hand, a game ball flowing through a flow-down path that does not pass through the first through gate 51 is repelled by each control nail 64b, making it difficult to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

In addition, the distance between the lowermost control nail 64b and the guide nail 64a is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, an event may occur in which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51 . However, it is not limited to this, and each distance may be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the above phenomenon does not occur.

An internal lottery is conducted when a winning to each of the through gates 51 to 53 is detected. The lottery result of the internal lottery is displayed on the accessory display section 62 . The accessory display portion 62 is provided on a decorative member 65 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 65 extends from the board surface of the game board 33 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 65 faces the window panel 22 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decoration member 65. - 特許庁

A character object display portion 62 is provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 65 . In other words, the character object display portion 62 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen falling in front of the character object display portion 62. is prevented. It should be noted that, on the upper surface of the decorative member 65, a part of the plurality of general prize winning openings 40 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

The character item display unit 62 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) is a front view of the accessory display section 62. FIG.

A display area 70 is formed in the accessory display section 62 to clearly indicate the lottery result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each of the through gates 51 to 53 . The display area 70 is divided vertically into three unit areas 71 to 73, and the unit areas 71 to 73 correspond to the through gates 51 to 53 one-to-one. Specifically, the first unit region 71 is associated with the first through gate 51, the second unit region 72 is associated with the second through gate 52, and the third unit region 73 is associated with the third through gate 51. It is associated with gate 53 .

Each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is formed so as to be able to display normal symbols of "O" and "X". When a predetermined through-gate (for example, the first through-gate 51) wins a prize, the unit area (for example, the first unit area 71) corresponding to the above-mentioned predetermined through-gate is marked with "○" and "X" using the winning as a trigger. ” is alternately displayed (variation display) of normal symbols is started, and the variable display of the normal symbols is performed over a predetermined time (period). Then, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning result, a normal symbol "O" is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the winning result in the corresponding unit area, and the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a losing result, a normal symbol "x" is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the losing result, and the variable display ends.

In addition, it is needless to say that the specific shape of the normal symbol is arbitrary as long as it can be specified that the winning result or the losing result can be specified. Moreover, it is arbitrary also about the fluctuation|variation display mode of a normal design.

Further, in the following description, when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the variable display of the normal symbol performed in the first unit area 71 is simply referred to as the first unit area 71 is referred to as winning variation display, and the variation display of normal symbols performed in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is a losing result is simply referred to as the first unit area 71 It is also called deviation display. The same applies to the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 .

In addition, the process from the start of the variable display of the first unit area 71 to the stop (fixed) display of the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the internal lottery to the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game cycle.

When the normal pattern of "○" is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery being a winning result, the electronic winning prize opening corresponding to the predetermined through gate among the electric winning prize openings 41 to 43 is selected. The expectation of winning the prize is getting higher.

A detailed configuration of each of the electronic winning openings 41 to 43 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5(a) is a front view showing the first electric prize winning port 41 and its surroundings, and FIG. 5(b) is a front view showing the second electric prize winning port 42 and its surroundings. In addition, since the second electric role winning opening 42 and the third electric role winning opening 43 are the same including the peripheral configuration, the second electric role winning opening 42 will be explained, and the third electric role winning opening 43 will be explained. detailed description is omitted.

Electric accessories 41a to 43a are provided in the electric role winning openings 41 to 43, respectively. Each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a has a pair of left and right movable pieces, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state, non-supported state or non-guided state) and an open state (opened state, supported state or guided state). is configured to In the closed state, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is small, it is difficult for the game balls to enter the electric winning openings 41-43. On the other hand, in the open state, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 5, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is large, game balls can easily enter the respective electric winning openings 41-43. In other words, it can be said that in the open state, there are more paths for game balls to flow down to the electrical winning openings 41 to 43 than in the closed state.

In the following description, the open state of each electric accessory 41a to 43a is simply called open, and the closed state of each electric accessory 41a to 43a is simply called closed.

The electric accessories 41a-43a are associated one-to-one with the through gates 51-53 (and the unit areas 71-73). Specifically, the first electric role object 41 a provided in the first electric role winning port 41 is associated with the first through gate 51 (first unit area 71 ), and the second electric role winning port 42 The provided second electric accessory 42a is associated with the second through gate 52 (the second unit region 72), and the third electric accessory 43a provided in the third electric role winning opening 43 is the third through gate. It is associated with the gate 53 (the third unit region 73). When the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the predetermined through gate is the winning result, after the winning fluctuation display of the unit area corresponding to the predetermined through gate is completed, the electric role corresponding to the predetermined through gate is displayed. The opening and closing operation of the object is performed in a predetermined operation mode. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning a prize to the electric role winning opening provided with the electric role product that is performing the opening/closing operation is increased. Note that the opening/closing operation of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is simply referred to as support. In this case, it can be said that the state in which the electric accessories 41a to 43a are being opened and closed is the state in which the electric accessories 41a to 43a are supported.

Here, regardless of the opening/closing state of the first electric role product 41a, the first electric role winning port 41 provided with the first electric role product 41a is configured so that no game ball wins. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(a), above the first electric prize winning port 41, there is provided a first specific regulation peg 64c that prohibits the first electric prize winning port 41 from winning. It is A plurality of the first specific regulation pegs 64c are arranged side by side so as to surround the first electric prize winning port 41 from the base side in the flowing direction of the game ball, and the distance between each first specific regulation peg 64c is greater than the diameter of the game ball. is also set small. As a result, the game ball cannot enter the first electric combination winning port 41.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, above the second electric role winning port 42 (and the third electric role winning port 43), when the second electric role object 42a is in the closed state, the winning of the second electric role winning port 42 is prohibited. A plurality of second specific control pegs 64d are provided to allow entry into the second electric role winning opening 42 when the second electric accessory 42a is in the open state. Each of the second specific control nails 64d is arranged in parallel on the flow-down route to the second electric role winning port 42 in the state where the second electric accessory 42a is in the closed state. The distance between each second specific regulation peg 64d is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the second specific control peg 64d and the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the closed state is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, while the second specific control peg 64d is in the open state. The distance from the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the situation is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the second electric accessory 42a is in the closed state, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the second electric role winning opening 42, and only when the second electric accessory 42a is in the open state, the second electric role Winning to the winning opening 42 is facilitated.

Note that the structure for disabling entry into the first electric prize winning port 41 is not limited to the first specific regulation nail 64c, and any structure that disallows entry into the first electric prize winning port 41 can be used. be. For example, instead of the first specific regulation nail 64c, a structure may be adopted in which a accessory is provided. Further, a movable accessory is provided at a position where entry of a game ball into the first electric role winning hole 41 is prohibited and a position where entry of the game ball is permitted, and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started. may be configured to move the accessory from the above-described permitted position to a prohibited position.

In addition, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the first electric role product 41a, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first electric role winning port 41. However, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which winning to the first electronic winning opening 41 is permitted when the opening is in the open state. In this case, when the first electric role product 41a is in the open state, the degree of expectation that the game ball wins the first electric role winning port 41 will It is preferable to adjust the positions of the specific regulation nails 64c and 64d so that the degree of expectation for the game ball to win the second electric role winning slot 42 (or the third electric role winning slot 43) is lower than that in the state of . In addition, there is no payout of game balls based on the winning to the first electric win winning port 41, or the number of payouts is reduced to the number of payouts based on winning to the second electric win winning port 42 and the third electric win winning port 43 may be set to be less than the number of

Further, even when the electric accessories 41a to 43a are closed, a prize can be awarded to each of the electric role winning openings 41 to 43. FIG. In short, it is only required that the electric accessories 41a to 43a shift from the closed state to the open state so that the expectation of winning the respective electric role winning openings 41 to 43 is increased.

Next, the positional relationship of the respective electric role winning openings 41 to 43 will be described. there is Also, the second electronic role winning port 42 and the third electronic role winning port 43 are provided above the variable display unit 61 .

The second electronic role winning opening 42 and the second electronic winning opening 42 and the second electronic winning opening 42 and the second electronic winning opening 42 are arranged so that different game balls need to be hit when winning the second electronic winning opening 42 and when winning the third electronic winning opening 43. The position of the 3rd electronic role winning opening 43 is set. Specifically, the second electric combination winning opening 42 and the third electric combination winning opening 43 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction in the game area. As a result, the flow path of the game ball that tends to win the second electric prize winning port 42 is different from the flow path of the game ball that tends to win the third electric prize winning port 43 . Therefore, when the opening and closing operation of the second electric role product 42a is being performed, the player can make the game ball flow down in the left area of the game area in order to increase the frequency of winning the second electric role winning opening 42. When the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 29 is changed and the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed, the right side area of the game area is played in order to increase the frequency of winning the third electric role winning opening 43. It is envisioned to change the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 29 so that the ball flows down.

In addition, in order to perform the above-mentioned division of hitting appropriately, a game ball that flows down in the area on the left side of the game area is provided on the upstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball from the second electric combination winning opening 42 and the third electric combination winning opening 43. flows down toward the second electric combination winning port 42, and a game ball flowing down in the area on the right side of the game area flows down toward the third electric combination winning opening 43.

It should be noted that the positional relationship between the second electric role winning opening 42 and the third electric winning opening 43 may be set so as to require separate beating. For example, the first electric winning opening 41 is arranged. A configuration may be adopted in which the third electric role winning opening 43 is arranged at a position.

The variable display unit 61 is provided with a pattern display device 81 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) decorative patterns (decorative patterns). A center frame 82 is arranged in the variable display unit 61 so as to surround the pattern display device 81 . The upper portion of the center frame 82 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 81, so that the problem of lowering the visibility of the display screen G due to the falling of the game ball does not occur. ing.

The symbol display device 81 is for notifying the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 . The pattern display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the design display device 81, for example, decorative designs are displayed in an arrangement on the top, middle and bottom, and these decorative designs are scrolled in the horizontal direction to be displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 81 is triggered by the winning of the first through gate 51 .

The center frame 82 is provided with holding ramp portions 91 to 93 corresponding to the through gates 51 to 53, respectively. Specifically, a first holding ramp portion 91 corresponding to the first through gate 51 is provided in the lower portion of the center frame 82 . The number of winning game balls in the first through gate 51 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by the lighting of the first reservation lamp part 91.例文帳に追加

A second holding lamp portion 92 corresponding to the second through gate 52 is provided on the upper left portion of the front side of the center frame 82 . The number of game balls winning the second through gate 52 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the second reservation lamp part 92.例文帳に追加

A third holding lamp portion 93 corresponding to the third through gate 53 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 82 . The number of winning game balls in the third through gate 53 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the third reservation lamp part 93.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 may be configured to be displayed as part of the pattern display device 81. FIG.

A stage 94 on which game balls can stay is provided at the bottom of the center frame 82 . The stage 94 has a width wider than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction, and has a smooth streamline shape symmetrical about the center. Specifically, the lateral center portion of the stage 94 is raised upward, and the left and right portions are recessed downward. In addition, an inclined surface inclined downward toward the rear is formed in the central portion. A guide passage 95 having a game ball exit above the first through gate 51 is provided behind this inclined surface. As a result, the game ball that has reached the central portion of the stage 94 is guided to the guide passage 95 by the inclined surface, and is further easily guided by the guide passage 95 to above the first through gate 51 . Then, this guided game ball passes through the first through gate 51 with a relatively high probability. As a result, the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage 94 can be increased.

Although not shown, the center frame 82 is formed with a game ball passage for guiding game balls to the stage 94 . The game ball passage is formed in a size through which game balls can pass. The game ball passage has an opening provided on the outside of the center frame 82 as an entrance, and an opening provided at the end of the stage 94 as an exit. As a result, the game ball entering the entrance portion is guided to the stage 94 via the game ball passage.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 101 and a sound emission control device 102 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 33).

The main control device 101 includes a main control board that controls the main game and a power outage monitoring board that monitors the power supply. Contained and configured. The board box 103 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 104 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), whereby the board box 103 is sealed. Since these box joints 104 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 103 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 103 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 104 are provided on the long side of the substrate box 103, and at least one of them is used for coupling processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 104 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 104 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if an unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 104 . When the circuit board box 103 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control circuit board or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the box connection portion 104 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box connection portion 104 are separated. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 103 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box connection portion 104 . If a history of opening the board box 103 is left in the board box 103, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 103 has been illegally opened.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 103, a sealing sticker may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 103 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The sound light emission control device 102 is equipped with a sound lamp control board that controls sound, lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) in accordance with instructions from the main controller 101. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. are housed in a substrate box 105.

The back pack unit 15 is provided with a back pack 111, as shown in FIG. The back pack 111 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 114 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 101, the sound emission control device 102, and the like from behind. is doing.

The payout mechanism part 112 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 114, and includes a tank 115 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game ball stored in the tank 115. and a payout device 116 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 116 are discharged to the upper tray 25a or the lower tray 26a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 116. FIG. The payout mechanism 112 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Controller assembly unit 113 includes payout controller 117 and power and launch controller 118 . The payout control device 117 and the power supply and launch control device 118 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 117 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 117 is configured by housing a payout control board for controlling the payout device 116 in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 117 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 103 of the main control device 101 .

The power supply and launch control device 118 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 29 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main controller 101 . The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. It is an element containing a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the functions of the ROM 203 and the functions of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 101, a payout control device 117, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, and the like. In this case, the power supply and launch control device 118 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205 , and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205 . In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211g, a plurality of detection sensors provided in the ball entry section for winning such as the general winning opening 40, each electric winning opening 41 to 43, and each through gate 51 to 53 are connected. The MPU 202 of the main control unit 101 determines whether a player has won a prize (determines whether a player has entered a ball). Also, the MPU 202 executes a support lottery based on the wins to the through gates 51-53.

The output side of the MPU 202 is connected with the power failure monitoring board 205, the payout control device 117 and the sound emission control device 102. FIG. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 117 based on the winning determination result for the general prize winning port 40 and each of the electric prize winning ports 41 to 43, for example. In this case, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 40 or the electronic winning openings 41 to 43 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output.

The MPU 202 outputs various commands such as a hold command, a release command, and a variation command to the sound emission control device 102 . In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, there is provided a first electric role product drive unit 41b for opening and closing the first electric role product 41a of the first electric role winning port 41, and a second electric role product 42a of the second electric role winning port 42. , the third electric accessory driving unit 43b for opening and closing the third electric accessory 43a of the third electric role winning opening 43, and the accessory display unit 62 are connected. there is Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201 , and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units and display control of the character object display unit 62 through the driver circuits.

In other words, when winning to a predetermined through gate among the through gates 51 to 53 is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined through gate, the predetermined through gate in the character object display section 62 corresponds to the winning. Variable display of normal symbols is performed in the unit area to be displayed. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning prize is winning, the driving control of the electric accessory driving section corresponding to the predetermined through gate is executed after the end of the variable display of the normal symbols.

Here, since the electric accessory drive units 41b to 43b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the electric accessory 41a to 43a, the electric accessory 41a to 43a can be driven and controlled individually. It is possible.

The blackout monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power and launch control 118 and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power and launch control 118, which is a stable 24 volts DC. The payout control device 117 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101 .

The power supply and launch control device 118 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201 and the payout control device 117 etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Also, the power supply and shooting control device 118 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

Based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the sound emission control device 102 operates the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61 and the display lamp unit 23 and the speaker provided in the front door frame 14. It drives and controls the unit 24 and also controls the display control device 212 .

The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 81 based on the command input from the sound emission control device 102 . In this case, the sound emission control device 102 determines, based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the variable display time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 81 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. do.

Here, the contents related to the variable display of decorative patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, as shown in FIGS. 7(a) to (i), 9 types of main pattern data with numbers "1" to "9" are added, and as shown in FIG. 7(j). and data of sub-symbols to which numbers are not attached are stored in advance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 81 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, triggered by the winning of the first through gate 51 or the start of support for the first electric role object 41a, the first unit area 71 is displayed in a variable manner or the first electric role object 41a is being supported. Then, the decorative patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper design row Z1 and the lower design row Z3 are composed of 18 decorative designs. On the other hand, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbols "9" and "1" are arranged. A main pattern of "4" is additionally arranged in , and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 decorative patterns with 10 main patterns arranged.

In addition, the result of the lottery can be grasped by stop-displaying the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the display screen G is designed so that three decorative symbols are stop-displayed for each symbol row. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and a combination of decorative patterns (combination of jackpot decorative patterns) with the same number attached to any of the effective lines is formed. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a moving image is displayed to indicate that the player is in an advantageous state.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

It should be noted that the manner in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 202 uses various counter information to perform a support lottery as to whether or not to open and close the electric accessories 41a to 43a, and to set the display of the accessory display unit 62. Specifically, As shown in FIG. 9, a first electric role counter C1 used for the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a, a second electric role counter C2 used for the support lottery for the second electric accessory 42a, and a second A third electric role counter C3 used for the support lottery for the three electric accessories 43a is used. Furthermore, a variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time, which is the time during which variation display is performed in the character item display section 62 .

Each of the electronic counters C1 to C3 and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 . The RAM 204 is provided with electrician holding areas 231 to 233 corresponding to the electric work counters C1 to C3, and the electric work counters C1 to C3 are stored with respect to the corresponding electric work holding areas. . More specifically, a first electrical role holding area 231 in which a first electrical role counter C1 is stored based on the winning of the first through gate 51, and a second electrical role counter C2 based on the winning of the second through gate 52. and a third electric role holding area 233 in which the third electric role counter C3 is stored based on the winning to the third through gate 53.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first electric function counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (240). The first electric winning counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the first electric winning holding area 231 at the timing when the game ball wins the first through gate 51.例文帳に追加

The value of the first electric role counter C1, which is the result of the support lottery losing the lottery result, is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the first electric role counter C1 is "7", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a lost result. On the other hand, if the value of the first electric role counter C1 is other than "7", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a is 240/241.

It should be noted that the value of the first electric function counter C1, which is the result of the deviation, is arbitrary. Further, the number of the first electric function counters C1 that result in the error is not limited to one, and may be plural.

The second electric duty counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (250). The second electric winning counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the second electric winning holding area 232 at the timing when the game ball wins the second through gate 52.例文帳に追加

The value of the second electric duty counter C2, which is the result of losing the support lottery, is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the second electric role counter C2 is "100", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a lost result. On the other hand, if the value of the second electric role counter C2 is other than "100", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery for the second electric accessory 42a is 250/251.

Note that the value of the second electric function counter C2 that results in a deviation is arbitrary. Further, the number of the second electric function counters C2 that result in the error is not limited to one, and may be plural.

The third electric function counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (232). The third electric winning counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the third electric winning holding area 233 at the timing when the game ball wins the third through gate 53. - 特許庁

The value of the third electric role counter C3, which is the result of losing the support lottery, is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the third electric role counter C3 is "200", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a lost result. On the other hand, if the value of the third electric role counter C3 is other than "200", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery for the third electric accessory 43a is 232/233.

Note that the value of the third electric function counter C3, which results in a deviation, is arbitrary. Further, the number of the third electric function counters C3 that result in the error is not limited to one, and may be plural.

In addition, although the probability of winning the support lottery is almost the same between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, it is not limited to this, and may be set to be exactly the same, or the difference may be increased. good too.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time of the normal symbols in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 of the character product display section 62 . In the following description, the variable display time of the normal symbols in each of the unit areas 71-73 is also simply referred to as the variable display time of each of the unit areas 71-73.

Here, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is the winning result (hereinafter also referred to as the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71) is set to a predetermined fixed time, specifically 0.5 sec. On the other hand, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is a loss result (hereinafter referred to as the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 ) is configured to vary according to the variation type counter CS. Further, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is also configured to vary according to the variation type counter CS.

Specifically, when the deviation fluctuation display is started in the first unit area 71 or when the fluctuation display is started in the other unit areas 72 and 73, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. be done. By referring to the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 222 provided in the ROM 203, the variable display time corresponding to the acquired value of the variable type counter CS is selected.

The variable display time table will be explained using FIG. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining various variable display time tables. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first table TD1, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second table TD2. FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third table TD3.

The variable display time table storage area 222 stores a plurality of variable display time tables corresponding to the unit areas 71-73. Specifically, the first table TD1 to be referred to when performing the variable display of normal symbols in the first unit area 71 in a situation where the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is a losing result. , a second table TD2 referred to when performing variable display of normal symbols in the second unit area 72, and a third table TD3 referred to when performing variable display of normal symbols in the third unit area 73. and are stored.

The first table TD1 is referred to only when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is a losing result, and as shown in FIG. is a table in which the numerical range of and the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 are associated with each other. As a result, the out-variation display time of the first unit area 71 varies according to the value of the variation type counter CS.

As shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C, the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 are tables in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time are associated with each other. In the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the type of variation display time are set to be the same. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time is different.

Specifically, "0 to 79" of the variation type counter CS is associated with 0.7 sec in the second table TD2, and is associated with 1.3 sec in the third table TD3. Further, "80 to 159" of the variation type counter CS is associated with 1.0 sec in the second table TD2, while 0.7 sec is associated in the third table TD3. Further, "160 to 198" of the variation type counter CS is associated with 1.3 sec in the second table TD2, while 1.0 sec is associated in the third table TD3.

According to this configuration, in a situation where the normal symbols of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 are displayed in a variable manner, the normal symbols in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 are displayed using the same variation type counter CS. When determining the variable display times of the symbols, different variable display times are selected. This action will be described later.

Here, the relationship between the variable display time of the first unit area 71 and the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 will be described. The winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set shorter than the shortest variation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, the winning variable display of the first unit area 71 is likely to end earlier than the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 .

On the other hand, the shortest variation display time (30 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the longest variation display time (1.3 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is likely to end before the out-variable display of the first unit area 71 ends.

It should be noted that the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be changed according to the lottery result of the support lottery. Specifically, the win variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set shorter than the loss variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be shortened, and the benefits given to the player can be increased.

On the other hand, the win fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set longer than the loss fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be lengthened, and the benefits given to the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the same numerical range (0.7 sec to 1.3 sec) related to the allocation of the fluctuation type counter CS was set, but this is not the only option. It is good also as composition which makes a numerical range differ.

Also, the variable display time to be allocated is common (0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.3 sec) in both the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, but different types of variable display time are allocated. The configuration may be set as the first. In the third table TD3, 0.8 sec, 0.9 sec, and 1.2 sec may be set as the variable display time of the allocation destination.

Returning to the description of FIG. 9, each of the electrical work holding areas 231 to 233 will be described.

First, the first electrician holding area 231 will be described. The first electrician reservation area 231 includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE comprises a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. Numerical information of the first electrical counter C1 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in one of the reserve areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first through gate 51 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 → the third Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. Since the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first through gate 51 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the reservation area RE includes a first reservation number storage area N1, in which the number of winning history to the first through gate 51 is reserved and stored. information is stored. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the first reservation number storage area N1, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the first through gate 51 is reserved and stored. Know how many

When the variable display of the first unit area 71 in the role item display portion 62 is started, the execution area AE displays numerical information of the first electric role counter C1 stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. This is an area for moving.

Next, the second electrician holding area 232 will be described. The second electrician holding area 232, like the first electrician holding area 231, comprises a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE comprises a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. The numerical information of the second electrician counter C2 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in one of the reserve areas RE1 to RE4 in the reserve area RE of the second electrician reserve area 232. FIG. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 in the reservation area RE of the second electrician reservation area 232, when winning to the second through gate 52 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of 1 reservation area RE1→second reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second through gate 52 are reserved and stored.

The reserve area RE of the second electrician reserve area 232 is provided with a second reserve number storage area N2, in which the winning history of the second through gate 52 is reserved and stored. Information for specifying the number of Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the second reservation number storage area N2, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the second through gate 52 is reserved and stored. Know how many

The execution area AE of the second electrical work holding area 232 is the first holding area RE of the second electrical work holding area 232 when starting the variable display of the second unit area 72 in the character object display section 62 . This is an area for moving the numerical information of the second electric counter C2 stored in the area RE1.

Next, the third electrician holding area 233 will be described. The third electrician holding area 233, like the first electrician holding area 231, comprises a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE comprises a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. The numerical information of the third electrician counter C3 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in one of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in the reservation area RE of the third electrician reservation area 233. FIG. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 in the reservation area RE of the third operator reservation area 233, when winning to the third through gate 53 occurs multiple times consecutively, the third Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of 1 reservation area RE1→second reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the third through gate 53 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the reservation area RE of the third electric work reservation area 233 is provided with a third reservation number storage area N3, and the winning history of the third through gate 53 is reserved and stored in the third reservation number storage area N3. Information for specifying the number of Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the third reservation number storage area N3, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the third through gate 53 is retained and stored. Know how many

The execution area AE of the third electric officer holding area 233 is set to the third holding area RE of the third electric role holding area 233 when starting the variable display of the third unit area 73 in the character object display section 62 . This is an area for moving the numerical information of the third electric counter C3 stored in the area RE3.

Here, as already explained, while the game ball is allowed to pass through the second through gate 52 via the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52 is allowed to pass through the first through gate 51. It is difficult for a game ball to pass through. For this reason, it is unlikely that the number of reservations (the number of prize winning histories), which is the number of pieces of reservation information reserved and stored in the first electrician's reservation area 231, becomes smaller than the number of reservations in the second electrician's reservation area 232. .

In addition, the game ball is less likely to pass through the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51 . For this reason, it is unlikely that the number of reservations (the number of prize winning histories), which is the number of pieces of reservation information retained and stored in the first electrician's reservation area 231, becomes smaller than the number of reservations in the third electrician's reservation area 233. .

In addition, since the number of holds that can be held and stored in each of the electric work holding areas 231 to 233 is the same, even if the number of winnings to the through gates 51 to 53 exceeds the number of holds that can be held and stored, However, the above event does not occur.

Although the number of holds that can be held and stored in each of the electric work holding areas 231 to 233 is set to be the same (four), the winning history that can be stored in each of the electric work holding areas 231 to 233 is not limited to this. It is good also as composition with which numbers differ. In this case, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above event, the number of holds that can be held and stored in the first electrician holding area 231 is changed to the number of holds that can be held and stored in the second electric work holding area 232 or the third electric work holding area 233. may be set equal to or greater than (N1≧N2 or N3).

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 101>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 202 in the main control device 101 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is activated when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 101, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S102, the first electric work counter C1, the second electric work counter C2 and the third electric work counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the first electric duty counter C1, the second electric duty counter C2, and the third electric duty counter C3 are each incremented by one, and each of these counter values is cleared to zero when they reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective electric duty counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. FIG. After that, in step S103, the timer interrupt process is terminated after executing the through prize winning process associated with the winning of each of the through gates 51-53.

Winning processing for through in step S103 will be described below.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has won the first through gate 51 or not. When determining that the game ball has not won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S206, while when determining that the game ball has won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S202, the first reservation It is determined whether or not the storage area N1 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment).

If the first pending number storage area N1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S206, while if the first pending number storage area N1 is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S203, the first pending number storage area N1 is incremented by 1.

In subsequent step S204, the current value of the first electrician counter C1 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the first electrician reserved area 231 of the RAM 204. FIG. It should be noted that in step S204, a command for specifying that the first electric function counter C1 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. FIG. The voice light emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the first holding lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the first electrical counter C1 acquired this time is stored. Executes processing for causing the part to emit light.

After that, in step S205, confirmation processing for holding notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S206. In the reservation notice confirmation process, command information reflecting the lottery result based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is set.

Confirmation processing for holding advance notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13 .

First, in step S301, the value of the first electric duty counter C1 acquired this time is grasped. Thereafter, support lottery processing is executed in step S302. In the support lottery process, it is determined whether or not the first electric role counter C1 ascertained in step S301 corresponds to a predetermined winning value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric duty counter C1 is "7".

In subsequent step S303, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S302 is a winning result. If the result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S304, a winning pending command is set, and this pending notice confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a winning result, more specifically, if it is a loss result, a loss pending command is set in step S305, and this confirmation process for pending notice is terminated. These pending commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of normal processing (FIG. 14), which will be described later. The sound emission control device 102 grasps that the first electric role counter C1 has been acquired and the lottery result of the support lottery (support lottery result) based on the reception of each of these hold commands.

As already explained, the probability of winning the support lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is 240/241, so the winning is almost guaranteed.

Returning to the description of the winning process for through (FIG. 12), in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second through gate 52 has won. When determining that the game ball has not won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S210, while when determining that the game ball has won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S207, and the second reservation number It is determined whether or not the storage area N2 is less than 4, which is the upper limit.

If the second pending number storage area N2 is greater than or equal to the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S210, while if the second pending number storage area N2 is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S208, the second pending number storage area Increment N2 by one. In the subsequent step S209, the current value of the second electrician counter C2 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the second electrician reserved area 232 of the RAM204. It should be noted that in step S209, a command for specifying that the second electric duty counter C2 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. FIG. The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the second holding lamp unit 92 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the second electrical counter C2 acquired this time is stored. Executes processing for causing the part to emit light.

In step S210, it is determined whether the game ball has won the third through gate 53 or not. When it is determined that the game ball has not won the third through gate 53, the winning processing for the main through is terminated as it is, while when it is determined that the game ball has won the third through gate 53, the process proceeds to step S211. , and determines whether or not the third pending number storage area N3 is less than 4, which is the upper limit.

When the third pending number storage area N3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the winning process for this through is terminated as it is, while when the third pending number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S212. , the third pending number storage area N3 is incremented by one. In the next step S213, the current value of the third electrician counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the third electrician reserved area 233 of the RAM 204, and the prize-winning process for this through is ended. It should be noted that in step S213, a command for specifying that the third electric duty counter C3 has been obtained is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. FIG. The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the third holding lamp unit 93 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the third electric duty counter C3 acquired this time is stored. Executes processing for causing the part to emit light.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processes of steps S401 to S408 are executed as regular processes with a period of 4 msec, and the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in step S410 in the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 117 . Also, if commands for effects such as various variable commands, various hold commands, and release commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 .

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the following step S403, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined start waiting time (for example, 5.0 sec) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without winning any of the through gates 51 to 53 . Then, when it is determined that the period has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 . The sound emission control device 102 transmits the demonstration display command to the display control device 212 as it is. The display control device 212 performs display control of the pattern display device 81 so that the demonstration image is displayed on the display screen G based on the reception of the demonstration display command.

After that, in steps S404 to S406, an electric role supporting process for driving and controlling the accessory display section 62 and the electric accessories 41a to 43a is executed.

As already explained, three unit areas 71 to 73 are formed in the accessory display section 62, and the electric accessories 41a to 43a are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the unit areas 71 to 73. ing. Therefore, in the electric support process, a process for controlling the unit areas 71 to 73 and the electric accessories 41a to 43a is executed. Specifically, based on the winning of each through gate 51 to 53, the variable display of each unit area 71 to 73 is started, and after the variable display time has elapsed, each through gate 51 to 53 is displayed for each unit area 71 to 73. A stop result corresponding to the result of the support lottery based on the winning a prize is displayed, and processing for ending the variable display is executed. Then, when the support lottery result is a winning result, the support of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is started after the end of the variable display (after the stop result is displayed).

Here, while the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is performed independently, the support of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a is performed in a situation where the support of one electric accessory is performed, and the other electric roles are displayed. Object support is no longer provided.

Specifically, in the situation where variable display is performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, the winning variable display of one unit area ends, and the support of the electric accessory corresponding to the one unit area is started. Based on this, it is configured to stop the variable display of normal symbols in other unit areas. Specifically, when the variable display of normal symbols is not performed in other unit areas, the variable display is not started, and when the variable display of normal symbols is performed in other unit areas, the variation It is configured to reset or pause the display. In this case, resetting invalidates the variable display performed in another unit area and the lottery result that triggered the variable display. Temporarily suspends the counting of the variable display time in the variable display that is being performed. The suspension of the variable display continues until the end of the support of the electric accessory. As a result, since the variable display does not end in other unit areas, the support for other electric accessories is not started.

Specifically, in step S404, a first electric role support process relating to display control of the first unit area 71 and drive control of the first electric role object 41a is executed. Then, in step S405, a second electric role handling process relating to display control of the second unit area 72 and drive control of the second electric role object 42a is executed. After that, in step S406, a third electric role handling process relating to display control of the third unit area 73 and drive control of the third electric role object 43a is executed. That is, in one process, the control of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order of the first unit area 71→the second unit area 72→the third unit area 73. FIG.

After execution of step S406, it progresses to step S407 and a game ball launch control process is performed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 118. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In subsequent step S408, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set (stored) in the RAM 204. FIG. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of normal processing. Then, the fluctuation type counter CS is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the variation type counter CS can be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S411 onwards is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S412 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S413 access to the RAM 204 is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Processing for 1st Electricity>
Next, the first electric duty handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15 .

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234 a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The first stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, and when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. , and will be cleared when the support is terminated.

If the first stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported (opening/closing operation). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second supported flag is set in the supported flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, and whether or not the third supported flag is set. determine whether or not The second supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed, and is erased when the opening/closing operation ends. The third supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed, and is erased when the opening/closing operation ends, similarly to the second supporting flag.

When both support flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the first unit area 71 and the drive control of the first electric accessory 41a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set in the out-of-state display flag storage area 234 c provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The deviation display flag is a flag that is set while the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 . And, as already explained, the result of losing is displayed in the first unit area 71 when the player does not win the support lottery for determining whether or not to open the first electric accessory 41a.

If the out-displaying flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S504, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first support flag is set in the support flag storage area 234 b provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The first supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed, and is erased when the opening/closing operation is completed.

If the first supporting flag is not set, the process advances to step S505 to determine whether or not the first support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. do. The first support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery related to the first electric accessory 41a and is erased when the first supporting flag is set.

If the first support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S506, and the first timer counter T1 stored in the first timer counter area 235a provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is "0". Determine whether or not there is The numerical value of the first timer counter T1 is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the process for dealing with the first electric power is terminated.

When the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S507, and it is determined whether or not the first unit area 71 is in the middle of the variable display of normal symbols. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S508, where the first electric role counter C1 (holding information) stored in the first electric role holding area 231 is still the object of the support lottery for the first electric role object 41a. It is determined whether or not there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first pending number storage area N1 is greater than "0".

If the value of the first pending number storage area N1 is "0", the process for dealing with the first electrician is terminated as it is. , in step S509, executes the first normal pattern fluctuation start process for starting the variable display of the normal pattern in the first unit area 71, and ends the first electric role corresponding process.

The 1st normal figure fluctuation start processing is demonstrated using the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, a process of subtracting 1 from the first reservation number storage area N1 is executed. After that, data setting processing is executed in step S602. In the data setting process, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in the first electrician reservation area 231 is executed. Specifically, the data in the first reservation area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, and the data is transferred from the second reservation area RE2 to the first reservation area RE1, the third reservation area RE3 to the second reservation area RE2, and the fourth reservation area RE4. →The data in each area is moved to the lower area side, such as the third reservation area RE3.

Further, in step S602, a process of setting a first shift command is executed. The shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 14). The voice light emission control device 102 performs light emission control of the first holding lamp section 91 based on the reception of the shift command.

In the subsequent step S603, support lottery processing is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric function counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is "7", which is a predetermined winning value. Then, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the result of determination in step S603 is a winning result. If it is a winning result, the process advances to step S605 to set the first support winning flag.

After that, in step S606, "250" is set in the first timer counter T1 as the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71. FIG. As already explained, the numerical value of the first timer counter T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. 5 sec.

After the process of step S606 is executed, a winning variation command is set in step S607. The winning variation command is sent to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the winning variation command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the support lottery for the first electric accessory 41a is not won, the flow advances to step S608 to execute the fluctuation display time lottery process for lottery for the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71. In this process, the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained, and the first table TD1 is referenced to grasp the outlier fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In the following step S609, a numerical value corresponding to the lost variable display time grasped in the variable display time lottery process is set in the first timer counter T1. Specifically, for example, when 30 sec is grasped as the deviation display time, "15000" is set to the first timer counter T1.

After that, in step S610, a deviation variation command including information for specifying a deviation variation display time is set. The deviation variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the deviation variation command will be described later.

After execution of the process of step S607 or step S610, the fluctuation display of the normal pattern in the first unit area 71 is started in step S611, and the first normal pattern fluctuation start process is finished.

That is, when the first electric work counter C1 is stored in the first electric work holding area 231, the success determination process (support lottery process) is executed using the first electric work counter C1, and the success determination process is executed. As a trigger, the variable display of normal symbols is performed. In this case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined based on the success/fail determination result (support lottery result) and the variable type counter CS.

Returning to the description of the first electric role handling process (FIG. 15), the first timer counter T1 is "0" in a situation where the first support winning flag is not set, and the first unit area 71 is displaying the fluctuation. If so (step S505: NO, step S506: YES, step S507: YES), it means that the deviation change display of the first unit area 71 has ended. In this case, in step S510, the first unit area 71 is caused to stop display the deviation result as the stop result.

In the subsequent step S511, a flag indicating the absence is set. This makes it possible for the MPU 202 to identify that the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 .

Also, in step S511, an out-of-variation end command is set. Then, the first electrical service handling process is terminated. The deviation fluctuation end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The sound emission control device 102 can recognize that the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 has ended based on the receipt of the deviation variation end command.

If the first support winning flag is set (step S505: YES), it is determined in step S512 whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the process for handling the first electric duty is terminated. On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is "0", it means that the winning variation display in the first unit area 71 has ended. In this case, the winning result is stop-displayed as the stop result in the first unit area 71 in step S513.

After that, in step S514, the flag during the first support is set, and the winning flag for the first support is erased.

In subsequent step S515, a process for starting the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is executed. Specifically, the first electric role product drive unit 41b is controlled so that the first electric role product 41a is in the open state.

After that, in step S516, "3000" is set in the first timer counter T1 as the opening time (the time during which the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state). As a result, 6 sec is set as the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. Then, the count counter CC stored in the count counter area 235b provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is set to "10". The count counter CC is a counter for ascertaining the number of game balls that have entered the first electric role winning opening 41 in a state where the first electric accessory 41a is in an open state.

After that, in step S517, an opening command is set, and the first electric duty handling process is terminated. The open command is sent to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the open command will be described later.

If the disconnection display flag is not set and the first support flag is set (step S503: NO, step S504: YES), the first electrical opening/closing process is executed in step S518. Terminate the electric service handling process.

The first electrical opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17 .

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S705. Determine whether or not it has occurred. If no prize has been awarded to the first electric prize winning port 41, the first electric prize opening/closing process is terminated as it is. , the value of the count counter CC is decremented by 1.

Thereafter, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is "0". Since the count counter CC is set to "10" as an initial value based on the opening state of the first electric accessory 41a, the process of step S704 is executed when the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state. It can also be said that it is a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls that have won the first electric combination winning port 41 in the situation has reached a predetermined upper limit value (specifically, 10).

If the count counter CC is not "0", the first electrical opening/closing process is terminated as it is, while if the count counter CC is "0", the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of controlling the first electric accessory driving section 41b is executed so that the first electric accessory 41a is closed.

In the subsequent step S706, the first supporting flag is erased to specify that the support of the first electric accessory 41a has ended.

After that, in step S707, a closing command is set, and the first electrical opening/closing process is terminated. The closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the closing command will be described later.

According to this process, the support of the first electric accessory 41a (opening of the first electric accessory 41a) is (A) after a predetermined time (6 sec) elapses, or (B) when the first electric role is won. The game ends when one of the following occurs: the number of prizes awarded to the mouth 41 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10).

Here, as already explained, the winning to the first electric prize winning port 41 is prohibited by the first specific control nail 64c. As a result, event (B) above cannot occur. Therefore, the opening time of the first electric accessary product 41a is 6 sec without changing according to the winning state.

Returning to the description of the first electric role handling process (FIG. 15), when the result of deviation is displayed in the first unit area 71, affirmative determination is made in step S503, and the deviation display handling process is executed in step S519. , terminates the first electric service handling process. That is, when the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the processing of steps S504 to S518 is not executed. In other words, when the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is not started, and the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is not performed. do not have.

The out-of-display handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18 .

The outlier display handling process is a process for waiting the start of the next variable display until a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the outlier variable display in the first unit area 71 . If the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is performing the variable display at the end timing of the deviation variable display, the variable display and the support based on the variable display are executed during the predetermined time. , After that, the ending and the production related to the next variable display are performed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is set in the standby flag storage area 234e provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The standby flag indicates that the variation display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are completed during the display of the out result. This is a flag that is set in the case and erased when the time required for the ending for informing the player of the end of the state advantageous to the player and the effect related to the next variable display has passed.

If the standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S802, and whether or not the normal symbol variable display of the second unit area 72 or the normal symbol variable display of the third unit area 73 is being performed. judge.

Here, when the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71 , new variable display is not started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . Furthermore, in step S502 (or step S523) of the first electric role handling process (FIG. 15), it is determined whether either the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a is being supported. is determined, and if none of the support is performed, the out-of-display handling process is executed. Therefore, the process of step S802 can also be said to be a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbols and the support based on the fluctuation display, which have been performed at the end timing of the loss fluctuation display, have ended.

If the variable display is performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the out-of-area display handling process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is not performed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol performed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display and the support based on the fluctuation display are terminated. means that In this case, the process advances to step S803 to set a standby flag.

In the following step S804, "4000" is set to the first timer counter T1 as a waiting time until the next variable display is started in the first unit area 71. FIG. As a result, 8 sec is set as the standby time from the timing when each of the above operations ends to the timing when the variable display in the first unit area 71 starts. The standby time is used to perform an effect related to the ending and the next variable display.

Then, in step S805, an ending command is set, and the out-of-order display handling process ends. The ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the ending command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the standby flag is set, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", it means that the standby time has not elapsed. In this case, the out-of-book display handling process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is "0", it means that the standby time has elapsed. In this case, in step S807, the out-of-progress display flag is erased, the standby flag is erased, and the out-of-progress display handling process ends.

According to this process, the next variation display for the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 is the variation display of the normal symbol performed at the end timing after the termination variation display and the variation display of the normal symbol. The support based on the variable display ends and does not start until the waiting time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to perform the fluctuation display of normal symbols and the support based on the fluctuation display, which was performed at the end timing of the loss fluctuation display, between the loss fluctuation display and the next fluctuation display. At the same time, it is possible to perform an effect related to the ending and the next variable display in the first unit area 71 .

The details of the effects related to the ending and the next variable display in the first unit area 71 will be described together with the processing executed by the sound emission control device 102 .

Returning to the description of the first electric role handling process (FIG. 15), when the second support flag or the third support flag is set (step S502: YES), in steps S520 to S522, the When the variable display of normal patterns is not performed in one unit region 71, the variable display of normal patterns is not newly started in the first unit region 71, and the normal patterns are changed in the first unit region 71.例文帳に追加When the display is being performed, a process of temporarily stopping the variable display is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S520, it is determined whether or not variable display is being performed in the first unit area 71 . When the variable display is being performed in the first unit area 71, the process proceeds to step S521 to execute a temporary stop process for maintaining the remaining variable display time of the variable display at the present time and the support lottery result related to the variable display.

Specifically, updating of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. As a result, the current first timer counter T1 is maintained. Also, when the first support winning flag is set, the first support winning flag is maintained.

Then, the variable display of the normal symbols performed in the first unit area 71 is temporarily stopped. In this case, the normal symbols of both "O" and "X" are simultaneously flashed and displayed.

If the variable display is not performed in the first unit area 71, or after the processing of step S521 is executed, in step S522, the first stop flag is set, and the first electrical handling processing is performed. finish.

When the variable display of normal symbols in the first unit area 71 is stopped (step S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the second support flag or the third support flag is set in step S523. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the process for dealing with the first electrical service is terminated as it is. to cancel the stoppage of the variable display of the first unit area 71 . In this case, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is paused, it is resumed from the paused state.

Specifically, first, in step S524, it is determined whether updating of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. If the update of the first timer counter T1 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S526. In addition to canceling the prohibition of updating, the variable display of normal symbols is resumed. As a result, updating of the first timer counter T1 is restarted.

In step S526, the first stopped flag is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S503.

That is, when the support of the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a is started in a situation where the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the first unit area 71, the normal symbols to be stopped are displayed. The count of the variable display time is temporarily stopped while the support lottery result related to the variable display is maintained. Then, based on the end of the support, the counting of the variable display time is resumed.

By the way, when the processing (steps S524 to S526) related to the cancellation of the stoppage is executed, the processing advances to step S503, so the cancellation of the stoppage and the start of the variable display can be performed in the same processing. As a result, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a ends, the variable display of the first unit region 71 is performed after the variable display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. is prevented from starting.

Specifically, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a ends in a predetermined processing time in the normal processing, the stop cancellation of the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed in the third electric role corresponding processing in the predetermined processing time. configured to be Then, for the predetermined processing time, the stop cancellation of the normal symbol is executed in the first electric role corresponding process in the next processing time, and the variable display of the first unit area 71 can be started. Then, in the next processing cycle, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 starts in the second electric role handling process and the third electric role handling process which are executed after the first electric role handling process. can be

In addition, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a ends at a predetermined processing time in the normal processing, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped in the first electric role corresponding processing at the next processing time for the predetermined processing time. Cancellation is executed, and the variable display of the first unit area 71 can be started. Then, in the next processing cycle, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 starts in the second electric role handling process and the third electric role handling process which are executed after the first electric role handling process. can be

According to this configuration, if the winning variation display time is set to be the same for the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72, and the third unit area 73, and furthermore, the support for one electric accessory ends. Even if the suspension of the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is canceled based on There is no

It should be noted that after the execution of the process related to the cancellation of the suspension, the first electric power handling process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the processing load per processing can be reduced. However, the winning variation display time is the same for the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and when the variation display of each unit area 71 to 73 is started at the same time, the second unit area Considering the fact that the variable display of 72 and the third unit area 73 may end earlier than the first unit area 71, the above configuration is superior.

Further, when stopping the variable display of the first unit area 71, the current first timer counter T1 is temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and when canceling the stop of the variable display of the first unit area 71, it is temporarily stored. The stored first timer counter T1 may be reset to the first timer counter T1.

<Second electric service handling process>
Next, the second electric duty handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second unit area 72 is in the process of stopping the variable display based on the support of the other electric accessory, specifically the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a. determine whether Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234 a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The second stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the second unit area 72 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. , and will be cleared when the support is terminated.

If the second stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set.

When both supporting flags are not set, processing related to display control of the second unit area 72 and drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second supporting flag is set.

If the second supporting flag is not set, the process advances to step S904 to determine whether or not the second support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. do. The second support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery for whether or not to open and close the second electric accessory 42a, and is erased when the second supporting flag is set.

If the second support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S905, and the second timer counter T2 stored in the second timer counter area 235c provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is "0". Determine whether or not The second timer counter T2 is updated so that its value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the value of the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the process for handling the second electric power is terminated.

When the second timer counter T2 is "0", it is determined in step S906 whether or not the second unit area 72 is in the middle of the variable display of normal symbols. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S907, where the second electric role counter C2 (holding information) stored in the second electric role holding area 232 is still the object of the support lottery for the second electric role object 42a. It is determined whether or not there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second pending number storage area N2 is greater than "0".

If the value of the second pending number storage area N2 is "0", the process for handling the second electric duty is terminated as it is. , in step S908, it is determined whether the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

If the out-of-display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S909, and the second unit region 72 executes the second normal pattern fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, and the second electronic Terminate the role correspondence process.

2nd normal figure fluctuation start processing is demonstrated using the flowchart of FIG. In addition, since the processing of steps S1001 to S1004 is the same as the processing of steps S601 to S604 of the first normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 16), detailed description is omitted.

If the support lottery for this time is won, an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, and the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, the second support winning flag is set, and the round counter RC provided in the round counter area 235d provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is set to "2". The round counter RC is a counter for defining the number of times (number of times of opening) that the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is in the open state in one opening/closing operation.

After execution of step S1005 or when making a negative determination in step S1004, in step S1006, a fluctuation display time lottery process for determining the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 by lottery is executed. Specifically, by acquiring the current value of the variation type counter CS and referring to the second table TD2, the variation display time corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS is grasped.

Then, in step S1007, a numerical value corresponding to the result of the lottery in step S1006 is set in the second timer counter T2. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result in step S1006 is 1.0 sec, "500" is set to the second timer counter T2. After that, the variable display of the second unit area 72 is started in step S1008, and the present second normal figure variation start processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the second electric role handling process (FIG. 19), if the out flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S908, and the second electric role handling process ends. Thereby, the second normal pattern fluctuation start process is not executed. Therefore, while the first unit area 71 is displaying the result of deviation, the second unit area 72 does not newly start the variable display.

When the second timer counter T2 is "0" in the situation where the second support winning flag is not set, and the normal symbol is displayed in the second unit area 72 (step S904: NO, step S905: YES, Step S906: YES), which means that the deviation display of the second unit area 72 has ended. In this case, in step S910, the deviation result is displayed in the second unit area 72, and the process for dealing with the second electric power is finished.

If the second support winning flag is set (step S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S911 to determine whether or not the second timer counter T2 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the process for handling the second electric power is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second timer counter T2 is "0", it means that the winning fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 has ended. In this case, the winning result is stop-displayed in the second unit area 72 in step S912.

In the following step S913, the second support in-progress flag is set and the second support winning flag is erased. After that, in step S914, "10" is set in the count counter CC as the upper limit value of the number of game balls that will win the second electric prize winning port 42, and the second electric prize corresponding processing ends.

If the second supporting flag is set (step S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S915, the second electric power opening/closing process is executed, and the second electric power handling process ends. The second electrical opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The aspect of the opening and closing operation (support) of the second electric accessory 42a is as follows. First, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a relatively short time, and after a short time, after a predetermined interval time, It is configured such that the opening time of the second electric accessory 42a is longer than the time opening and the opening is performed for a long time.

Specifically, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is open (open state). If the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1102 to determine whether the second timer counter T2 is "0". If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric role opening/closing process is terminated as it is. A process for controlling the second electric accessary product drive unit 42b is executed so that the 42a is opened.

Specifically, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "2". Since "2" is set as the initial value of the round counter RC, when the round counter RC is "2", it means that the opening this time is the first (first time) opening. In this case, a count stop command is set in step S1105. The count stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the count stop command will be described later.

After that, in step S1106, the second timer counter T2 is set to "250", and the second electrical opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the round counter RC is not "2", in step S1107, "2750" is set in the second timer counter T2 as the opening time of the long opening (second opening), and End the open/close process.

If the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1108 to determine whether the second timer counter T2 is "0". When the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process advances to step S1109 to execute a process of controlling the second electric role product drive unit 42b so as to close the second electric role product 42a.

After that, in step S1110, update processing for subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is executed.

Then, in step S1111, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the round counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1117. Terminate the electrical opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the process advances to step S1113 to execute a process of determining whether or not a prize has been awarded to the second electric prize winning port 42. If no prize has been won in the second electric role winning opening 42, the process for opening and closing the second electric role is terminated as it is. Then, update processing is executed to decrement the count counter CC by 1.

In the following step S1115, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is "0". If the count counter CC is not "0", the second electrical opening/closing process is terminated as it is. A process of controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, the process of ending the support of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. Specifically, the second supporting flag is erased. Then, in step S1118, a count restart command is set, and the second electrical opening/closing process is terminated. This count restart command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). Processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the count restart command will be described later.

According to such processing, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started, first, the second electric accessory 42a is released for a short time. The opening time of the short-time opening is set to 0.5 sec. After the short-time opening ends, the second electric accessory 42a is closed. The closure lasts for 1 sec. Then, after the above time has elapsed, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a long time.

For the support of the second electric accessory 42a, (A) the opening time of the second electric accessory 42a, more specifically, the combination of the short-time open time and the long-time open time is predetermined. Either the upper limit open time (0.5 sec + 5.5 sec = 6.0 sec), or (B) the number of game balls winning the second electric win opening 42 reaches the predetermined upper limit number (10) It continues until either event occurs. As a result, it is possible to adjust the privilege given to the player, and to prevent the situation where the support is not finished due to the non-win of the game ball.

In this case, the opening time of the short-time opening is set shorter than 0.6 sec, which is the firing cycle of the game ball. Even if the ball is shot, it is unlikely that the game ball will win a prize while the game ball is open for a short period of time.

In addition, since the interval time is set to be longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, the game ball is shot at least once during the interval time.

Returning to the description of the second electric role handling process (FIG. 19), if the first supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S902. Then, in steps S916 to S920, when the variable display of normal symbols is not performed in the second unit area 72, the variable display of normal symbols is not newly started in the second unit area 72, When the variable display of normal symbols is being performed in the second unit area 72, a process of resetting (invalidating) or suspending the variable display is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S916, it is determined whether or not variable display is being performed in the second unit area 72 . If the variable display is not being performed, the second stopped flag is set in step S920, and the second electric duty handling process is terminated. As a result, the second normal symbol fluctuation start process is not executed in the second electric role corresponding process (FIG. 19), so that the normal symbol fluctuation display is not newly started in the second unit area 72 .

On the other hand, if the variable display is being performed in the second unit area 72, the flow advances to step S917 to determine whether or not the first supported flag is set.

When the first support flag is set, the process proceeds to step S918, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently performed in the second unit area 72 and the support lottery result related to the fluctuation display are reset. Execute reset processing. Specifically, the second timer counter T2 is initialized to "0". Furthermore, the variable display of normal symbols is ended without displaying the stop result. Further, when the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is erased.

After that, in step S920, the second stopped flag is set, and the second electric duty handling process is terminated.

If the first supported flag is not set, it means that the third supported flag is set. In this case, in step S919, a pause process is executed to maintain the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the second unit area 72 at the present time and the support lottery result related to the variable display. Specifically, the updating of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, and the variable display of the normal symbols is temporarily stopped. Further, when the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is maintained.

After that, in step S920, the second stopped flag is set, and the second electric duty handling process is terminated.

When the variable display of normal symbols in the second unit area 72 is stopped (step S901: YES), it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the third support flag is set in step S921. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the process for dealing with the second electrical service is terminated as it is. to cancel the suspension of the variable display of the second unit area 72 .

Specifically, first, in step S922, it is determined whether updating of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S924. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S923 to update the second timer counter T2. Release the prohibition of and restart the variable display of normal symbols.

After that, in step S924, the second stop flag is erased, and the second electric duty handling process is terminated.

According to this processing, when the support of the first electric accessary product 41a is started in the situation where the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the second unit area 72, the variable display of the normal symbols currently being performed is performed. is reset. Specifically, the variable display of normal symbols currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery results related to the variable display are erased. As a result, after the suspension of the variable display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 is canceled, the second electric role counter C2 stored in the second electric role holding area 232 is used in the second unit area 72. A variable display of normal symbols is newly performed.

On the other hand, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a is started in the situation where the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the second unit area 72, the state in which the support lottery result related to the variable display to be stopped is maintained. to pause the count of the variable display time. Then, when the support of the third electric accessary product 43a ends, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

<Third power handling process>
Next, the third electric role handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22 .

First, in step SS1201, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the third unit area 73 is stopped based on the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234 a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The third stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the third unit area 73 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is started. , and will be cleared when the support is terminated.

If the third stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first supporting flag or the second supporting flag is set.

When both supporting flags are not set, processing related to display control of the third unit area 73 and drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third supporting flag is set.

If the third supporting flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the third supporting winning flag is set in the supporting winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flags storing area 234 of the RAM 204. do. The third support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery for whether or not to perform the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, and is erased when the third supporting flag is set.

If the third support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the third timer counter T3 stored in the third timer counter area 235e provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is "0". Determine whether or not The third timer counter T3 is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the process for dealing with the third electric duty is terminated.

When the third timer counter T3 is "0", it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the variable display of normal symbols is being performed in the third unit area 73. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1207, and the third electric role counter C3 (holding information) stored in the third electric role holding area 233 is still the object of the support lottery for the third electric role object 43a. It is determined whether or not there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third pending number storage area N3 is greater than "0".

When the value of the third pending number storage area N3 is "0", the process for dealing with the third electric role is terminated as it is. , in step S1208, it is determined whether the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

If the out-displaying flag is set, the process for dealing with the third electrical role is terminated as it is. A third normal pattern variation start process for starting variable display of normal symbols is executed, and the present third electric role corresponding process is terminated. The third normal pattern fluctuation start processing is the same as the second normal pattern fluctuation start processing ( FIG. 20 ), so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the second normal pattern fluctuation start processing and the third normal pattern fluctuation start processing may be executed in the same processing times of the normal processing (FIG. 14). In this case, the variation display time is selected by lottery using the same variation type counter CS.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 differ in the variation display time associated with the value of the variation type counter CS. As a result, different variation display times are selected for the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 even when the same variation type counter CS is used.

When the third timer counter T3 is "0" in the situation where the third support winning flag is not set, and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable display in the third unit area 73 (step S1204: NO, step S1205: YES, Step S<b>1206 : YES), which means that the deviation fluctuation display of normal symbols in the third unit area 73 has ended. In this case, in step S1210, the result of deviation is displayed in the third unit area 73, and the process for dealing with the third electric role ends.

If the third support winning flag is set (step S1204: YES), the process advances to step S1211 to determine whether or not the third timer counter T3 is "0". If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the process for dealing with the third electric duty is terminated.

On the other hand, when the third timer counter T3 is "0", it means that the winning variation display of normal symbols in the third unit area 73 has ended. In this case, the winning result is stop-displayed in the third unit area 73 in step S1212.

In the subsequent step S1213, the third support in-progress flag is set and the third support winning flag is erased.

Thereafter, in step S1214, the count counter CC is set to "10" as the upper limit value of the number of game balls that will win the third electric role winning port 43, and the third electric role handling process is terminated.

If the third supporting flag is set (step S1203: YES), the process advances to step S1215 to execute the third electric power opening/closing process and end the third electric power handling process. The third electric switch opening/closing process is basically the same as the second electric switch opening/closing process (FIG. 21), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

When the flag during the first support or the flag during the second support is set, in steps S1216 to S1220, when the variable display of normal symbols is not performed in the third unit area 73, the third In the unit area 73, the variable display of normal symbols is not newly started, and when the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the third unit area 73, the process of resetting or temporarily stopping the variable display is executed. do. Since this process is basically the same as steps S916 to S920 of the second electrician handling process (FIG. 19), description thereof will be omitted.

Also, when the variable display of normal symbols in the third unit area 73 is stopped (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the second support flag is set in step S1221. do. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the process for dealing with the third electrician is terminated as it is. to cancel the stop of the variable display of the third unit area 73 . Since this process is basically the same as steps S922 to S924 of the second electrician handling process (FIG. 19), description thereof will be omitted.

According to this processing, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in the situation where the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the third unit area 73, the variable display of the normal symbols currently being performed is performed. is reset. Specifically, the variable display of normal symbols currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery results related to the variable display are erased. As a result, after the stop of the variable display of the normal symbols in the third unit area 73 is canceled, the third electric role counter C3 stored in the third electric role holding area 233 is used in the third unit area 73. A variable display of normal symbols is newly performed.

On the other hand, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started in the situation where the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the third unit area 73, the state in which the support lottery result related to the variable display to be stopped is maintained. to pause the count of the variable display time. Then, the counting of the variable display time is restarted based on the end of the support of the second electric accessory 42a.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game, more specifically, the variable display of normal symbols in each unit area 71-73 and the operation of each electric accessory 41a-43a will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. (a) to (c) show winning to each through gate 51 to 53, (d) to (f) show execution timing of variable display of normal symbols in each unit area 71 to 73, (g) to (h) shows the opening/closing modes of the electric accessories 41a to 43a.

First, a game ball wins the first through gate 51 at the timing of t1 in a situation where each holding information, specifically, each of the electric work counters C1 to C3 has not been acquired in each of the electric work holding areas 231 to 233. . As a result, the first electric role counter C1 is acquired, and a support lottery using the first electric role counter C1 is performed, and the variable display in the first unit area 71 is started. The support lottery result is the winning result. In this case, 0.5 sec is set as the win variation display time of the first unit area 71 .

After that, the game ball that has entered the first through gate 51 enters the second through gate 52 at the timing of t2. As a result, the second electric role counter C2 is acquired, and a support lottery using the second electric role counter C2 is performed, and the variable display in the second unit area 72 is started.

That is, when the hold information is not acquired in each of the electric work hold areas 231 to 233, the variation display of the normal symbols of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is sequentially started at the acquired timing. In this case, the first through gate 51 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 , and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 51 is arranged without the first through gate 51 . Since winning the gate 53 is regulated, the acquisition timing of the first electric role counter C1 is less likely to be later than the acquisition timings of the other electric role counters C2 and C3. Therefore, in a situation where the variable display of normal symbols is not performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, the variable display in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is performed before the variable display in the first unit area 71. Initiated events are unlikely to occur.

After that, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends at the timing of t3.

Here, the longest time from the passage timing of the first through gate 51 to the passage timing of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is shorter than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71. , the distances between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 are set. The shortest variation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set longer than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71 . Thereby, the variable display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is easily started during the winning variable display of the first unit region 71, and during the variable display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 Winning variation display in the first unit area 71 is likely to end.

Also, at the timing of t3, the opening/closing operation (support) of the first electric accessory 41a is started based on the end of the winning fluctuation display. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is released.

Furthermore, based on the start of the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a (the winning variation display ends in the first unit area 71), the currently performed variation display, specifically the second unit area The variable display of 72 normal symbols stops. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbols to be stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends during the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are displayed. Opening and closing operations are not performed.

In order to distinguish between the end of normal variable display and the stop (end) of variable display related to reset, the stop of variable display related to reset is indicated by an arrow in FIGS.

After that, the first through gate 51 and the third through gate 53 are won at timings t4 and t5 during the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a. In this case, since the first electric accessory 41a is open/closed (supported), the variable display of normal symbols in the third unit area 73 is not started.

Then, at the timing of t6, the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a ends. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, in the first unit area 71, the variable display of normal symbols is performed again. The variable display is based on the occurrence of winning to the first through gate 51 at the timing of t4. It should be noted that the variable display is winning variable display. In this case, the variable display time is 0.5 sec.

Further, based on the completion of the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the stop of the variable display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is released. As a result, the variable display of the third unit area 73 based on the winning of the third through gate 53 at the timing of t5 is started. In this case, any one of 0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1, and 3 sec is set as the variable display time of the third unit area 73 regardless of the result of the suitability determination.

After that, the winning to the first through gate 51 occurs at the timing of t7. Then, at the timing of t8, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends. Based on the end of the winning variation display, the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is started, and the currently performed variation display, specifically, the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is stopped. do. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbols to be stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset.

That is, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display ends at the timing before the end timing of the normal symbol variation display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. . Then, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is completed, and based on the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the variation display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is performed. Stop. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbols to be stopped and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. Thereby, the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is not performed, and only the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. As already explained, since the first electric accessory 41a cannot be won, there are few benefits based on the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a.

Incidentally, as already explained, the number of holds that can be stored in each of the electric work holding areas 231 to 233 is four. For this reason, by passing a large number of game balls through the first through gate 51 within a time shorter than the digestion time of the hold information, the number of the second call than the number of holds stored in the first call hold area 231 An event may occur in which the sum of the numbers of holds stored in both the winning combination holding area 232 and the third winning combination holding area 233 is larger (N1<N2+N3). In this case, variable display is performed in each of the unit areas 71-73. In the above situation, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is the winning variable display, the winning variable display is likely to end earlier than the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . When the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends, the variation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are reset. That is, the winning variation display of 1 resets the variation display of 2 and the support lottery result. As a result, even if the above event occurs, the event of starting the support of the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t9 to t13 during the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, winning to one of the through gates 51 to 53 occurs.

Then, at the timing of t14, the opening/closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is completed, and the variable display is started in each of the unit areas 71-73. In this case, it is assumed that the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71 and the winning variation display is performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . In this case, since the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is preceded. At this time, the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends.

Here, assuming that the variable display time of the second unit area 72 is selected to be shorter than the variable display time of the third unit area 73, the variable display of the second unit area 72 ends at the timing of t15. , the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started. Specifically, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for the first time. Based on the start of the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 or the third unit area 73 ends while the second electric accessory 42a is open, and the opening and closing operations of the first electric accessory 41a and the third electric accessory 43a are completed. is prevented from starting. In addition, in FIGS. 23(d) to 23(f), the state of temporary stop is indicated by a double line.

At the subsequent timing t16, the first opening of the second electric accessory 42a ends. Then, at the timing of t17 when 1 sec has passed from the timing of t16, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for the second time.

After that, at the timing of t18, the condition for ending the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is established, and the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is completed. In this case, when the hold information (the second payroll counter C2) is stored in the second payroll hold area 232, the variable display of normal symbols based on the hold information is newly started in the second unit area 72. be done.

Further, based on the completion of the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the temporarily stopped variable display in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is resumed. That is, the time during which the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed (the time from the timing of t15 to the timing of t18) is the pause time.

At the subsequent timing t19, the remaining variable display time of the third unit area 73 elapses, and the variable display of the normal symbols in the third unit area 73 ends. Based on the end, the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started. Specifically, the third electric accessory 43a is opened for the first time. Based on the start of the opening and closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 or the second unit area 72 ends while the third electric accessory 43a is open, and the opening and closing operations of the first electric accessory 41a and the second electric accessory 42a are completed. is prevented from starting.

Here, the variable display time of the third unit area 73 is the sum of the time from timing t14 to timing t15 and the time from timing t18 to timing t19. In other words, the timing of t19 when the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started is the variable display time of the third unit region 73 from the timing of t14 when the variable display of the third unit region 73 is started. , and the time when the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed.

Then, the first opening is completed at the timing of t20, and the second opening is performed at the timing of t21. The second opening continues until the termination condition is satisfied.

When the condition for ending the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is satisfied at the timing of t22, the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is completed. In this case, when the hold information (the third payroll counter C3) is stored in the third payroll hold area 233, the variable display of normal symbols based on the hold information is newly started in the third unit area 73. be done.

Further, based on the completion of the opening and closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the temporarily stopped variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is resumed. Then, at the timing of t23, the variable display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 ends, and the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started again, and the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 The variable display of normal symbols is temporarily stopped.

The variable display time of the second unit area 72 is the sum of the time from timing t18 to timing t19 and the time from timing t22 to timing t23. In other words, the timing of t23 when the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started is the variable display time of the second unit region 72 from the timing of t18 when the variable display of the second unit region 72 is started. , and the time during which the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed.

In other words, while the first unit area 71 is being displayed with variation, the variation display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends, and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a open and close. action is performed. In this case, while one of the second electric role product 42a and the third electric role product 43a is being opened and closed, the normal symbols are displayed in the unit areas corresponding to the other electric role products. pauses. Then, based on the completion of the opening/closing operation of the one electric accessory, the variable display of the normal symbols in each unit area corresponding to the other electric accessory is resumed, and the unit area corresponding to the one electric accessory is resumed. The variable display of normal symbols in is started. As a result, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second electric winning opening 42 and the third electric winning opening 43 is increased in the situation where the normal symbol deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first unit area 71 . Therefore, the number of benefits given to the player increases compared to the case where the winning variable display is performed in the first unit area 71 .

In this case, the support interval of the second electric accessory 42 a or the third electric accessory 43 a depends on the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . These fluctuation display times fluctuate according to the fluctuation type counter CS. This makes it difficult to grasp the support interval based on the end timing of the support. Therefore, the game can be played while predicting the start timing of the support, and attention can be paid to the game during the deviation display of the first unit area 71 .

In particular, at the start timing of the deviation display of the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 can start the fluctuation display at the same time. In this case, the variation display times of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are determined using the same variation type counter CS. In this case, since the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 have different variation display times corresponding to the variation type counter CS, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 have different variation display times. is selected. As a result, immediately after one variable display and the opening/closing operation based thereon are finished, the other variable display is finished, and the opening/closing operation based thereon is not performed.

Further, as already explained, the opening/closing operation mode of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is configured such that after a short period of opening, an interval of 1 sec passes, and a long period of opening is performed. Therefore, the player confirms that the opening has been performed for a short period of time, and grasps the electric accessory to be opened/closed this time. Then, the game ball is shot toward the electric role winning opening provided with the electric accessory that is to be opened and closed this time during the interval of 1 sec. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a prize to the electric role winning opening corresponding to the electric role product that opens and closes. In other words, it can be said that the short-time opening of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is for notifying the player of the electric accessory that will be opened and closed this time. It can also be said that the interval between the opening and the long-time opening is the time for the player to distinguish between shots based on the notification.

In particular, in a situation where the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a can be supported, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a. . In such a situation, since the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a, which is the object of interest, is notified of the sorting, the player can reliably confirm the notification of the sorting. ing.

Also, since the interval time is set longer than the game ball shooting period, at least one game ball can be shot during the interval. As a result, the launch direction of the game ball can be adjusted based on the flow pattern of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the above-described separate hitting.

Furthermore, the support end condition includes that the total open time of the short-time open and long-time open becomes the upper limit open time. In such a configuration, since the first opening as notification of splitting is a short-time opening, it is possible to secure a long opening time for long-time opening for awarding a privilege to the player. As a result, it is possible to suitably inform the player of the sorting while securing the player's profit.

The opening and closing operation modes of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are not limited to this, and may be configured to be opened three times or more, for example. In this case, if the number of short-time openings is increased, it becomes more conspicuous, making it easier to grasp the target of the opening/closing operation. On the other hand, since it is necessary to shorten the opening time of the long opening so as not to exceed the upper limit opening time, the benefits that the player can obtain are likely to decrease.

In addition, although the short-time opening and the long-time opening are performed with different opening times, the opening is not limited to this. For example, the opening may be performed multiple times in one opening time. In this case, it is preferable to set the opening time longer than 0.6 sec, which is the game ball shooting cycle, so that the game ball can be entered to some extent during the opening.

Also, the interval time is arbitrary as long as the time for performing separate hitting is secured. However, if the interval time is set long, there is a risk that the action of not firing the game ball during the interval, the so-called stopping shot, will be performed. I hope you are.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of opening/closing modes with different interval times are prepared in advance, and one opening/closing mode is selected from the plurality of opening/closing modes when the opening/closing operation is started. With this configuration as well, the stopping strike can be suppressed.

The variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening and closing operations of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are repeated, and the deviation display of the first unit area 71 is performed at the timing of t24. As time elapses, the deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71 . In this case, the variable display of normal symbols performed in the second unit area 72 is continued.

Incidentally, as already explained, the count of the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 is counted only when the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is not performed. That is, the time from the start timing (timing of t14) of the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 to the end timing (timing of t24) of the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is determined by lottery. It is the sum of the time and the time when the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is performed.

After that, winning to the third through gate 53 occurs at the timing of t25. In this case, since the deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71 , a new variable display is not started in the third unit area 73 .

Then, at the timing of t26, the variable display of the second unit area 72 ends, and the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started.

After that, the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t27. As a result, all of the variable display of the second unit area 72, the variable display of the third unit area 73, the opening/closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and the opening/closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a are completed, and standby. Time count begins.

Then, at the timing t28 when the waiting time has passed, the display of the deviation result ends, and a new variation display is started in each of the unit areas 71-73.

That is, when the deviation display of the first unit area 71 ends, the fluctuation display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 continues without being stopped. Therefore, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may end while the deviation result of the first unit area 71 is being displayed. In this case, if the variable display is a winning variable display, the opening/closing operation of the corresponding electric accessory is performed.

On the other hand, during the display of the deviation result of the first unit area 71, the start of a new change display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is regulated. That is, during the display of the deviation result of the first unit region 71, at the end timing of the deviation variation display, the variable display has already been performed in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 as usual. Processing is performed, after which no new variable display is started. In other words, the period from when the first unit area 71 starts to display fluctuation fluctuations to when the waiting time count starts (from the timing of t14 to the timing of t27) is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (a privilege for the player). is likely to be provided), and the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can end. It is an advantageous condition to end.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the display time of the deviation result is the second unit region 72, the third unit region 73, the second electric role object 42a, and the third electric role object 43a from the display start timing of the deviation result. Although the time is the sum of the time until the timing when the operation ends and the standby time, the time is not limited to this, and may be set as a predetermined fixed time, for example. In this case, the fixed time is the sum of the maximum time required for the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, and the standby time. should be set longer than As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because there is no inconvenience that the display of the losing result ends while each of the above actions is being performed.

<About the configuration for performing various productions>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects using the speaker section 24, the pattern display device 81 and the like will be described.

First, the electrical configuration for performing various effects will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio emission control board 241 provided in the audio emission control device 102 . The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. It is an element in which a RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. In addition, it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 101 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main controller 101, it receives various commands already explained.

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61, the display lamp unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212. is connected. The MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 determines the effect pattern based on the command received from the main control device 101, transmits the effect command corresponding to the effect pattern to the display control device 212, and receives it from the main control device 101. The received command is transmitted to the display control device 212 as it is.

The display control device 212 is equipped with an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively. It should be noted that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

In the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, based on the reception of various production commands from the sound emission control device 102, processing corresponding to the production commands is executed, and the VDP 255 corresponding to the processing result is drawn in the video RAM 257. Various images are displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 81 by executing the process.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 81 . Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252 and the video RAM 257 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as decorative designs displayed on the design display device 81 . The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display decoration patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 256 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 256 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 .

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257, the display content of the pattern display device 81 is changed.

<Production Control Processing Executed by Audio Light Emitting Control Device 102>
Next, the effect control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect control process is periodically (for example, at a 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 242, and based on a command received from the main control device 101, determines one of various effects, A process or the like for performing a variable display of the decorative symbols on the display screen G is executed based on the determined mode of presentation.

In the following description, the variable display of normal symbols in the first unit area 71 will be described as a game cycle. As already explained, the game cycle is the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the first unit area 71 to the display of the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result until the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped. be. In this case, the game times when the support lottery result is the winning result (the winning fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71) are the winning game times, and the game times when the support lottery result is the losing result (the first unit The deviation fluctuation display of normal symbols in the area 71) is called a deviation game round. The game time of the winning game time is the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 , and the game time of the losing game time is the loss variation display time of the first unit area 71 .

As various effects, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to the game times are prepared. Specifically, for the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game rounds, the suspension notice effect and the time saving suspension notice effect that are performed when the next game round continues, and the predetermined winning game round When the next winning game round is discontinuous with respect to the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the time-saving normal effect (excluding the lost game round and the winning game round), and the advantage performed in the lost game round A production during the state is set.

The pending notice effect and the time-saving pending notice effect refer to the content of the hold information (first electric role counter C1) stored in the first electric role holding area 231, specifically, the support lottery result using the holding information. It is a suggestive performance. The suspension notice effect and the time reduction suspension notice effect are the timing before the game round related to the suspension information is started, specifically the first electric accessory 41a related to the suspension information one before the suspension information. Start at the start of support or during support.

Specifically, the suspension notice effect is executed when the suspension information related to the next game round is acquired at the timing of starting the support of the first electric accessory 41a. On the other hand, the time saving suspension notice effect is executed when the suspension information related to the next game round is acquired during the support of the first electric accessory 41a.

In addition, the suspension notice effect includes a normal suspension notice effect selected when the next game round is a winning game round, an advantageous hold notice effect selected when the next game round is a lost game round, is set. Similarly, for the time-saving reservation notice effect, the time-saving normal reservation notice effect selected when the next game time is the winning game time, and the time-saving advantage selected when the next game time is the game time off A pending notice effect is set.

Each normal pending notice performance is executed across the support based on the predetermined winning game round and the next game round which is the game round based on the holding information which is the target of the performance of the normal holding notice performance. On the other hand, each advantageous holding notice effect is performed only during the support based on the predetermined winning game round. This is to prevent each of the advantageous holding notice effects and the effect during the advantageous state from being performed at the same time.

In the effect control process, one of the various effects described above is executed according to the command received from the main controller 101 and the status of the hold information stored in the first electric role hold area 231 .

Describing a specific processing configuration, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a pending command, specifically a winning pending command or a losing pending command, has been received. The pending command is a command that is set when the first electric function counter C1 is acquired, as already explained. In particular, the win pending command is a command set when the result of the support lottery using the obtained first electric role counter C1 is a winning result, and the lost pending command is set when the obtained first electric role counter C1 is won. This command is set when the support lottery result using the counter C1 is a lost result.

If the pending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1303. If the pending command has been received, the process for responding to the pending command is executed in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303. In steps S1303 to S1315, processing corresponding to various commands other than pending commands is executed.

Here, as already explained, the pending command is transmitted from the main control unit 101 to the sound emission control unit 102 when the winning to the first through gate 51 occurs and the first electric role counter C1 is obtained. It is what is done. Therefore, depending on the timing of the winning of the first through gate 51, the pending command and other commands may be set in the same normal processing cycle. Therefore, by first executing the process related to the pending command and then executing the process corresponding to the other command after executing the process, there is no time lag between the process corresponding to the pending command and the process corresponding to the other command. It's like

The pending command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, processing for storing hold command information included in the received hold command in the RAM 244 of the sound emission control device 102 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 244 is provided with a pending command information storage area 261 for storing pending command information. The pending command information storage area 261 includes four unit storage areas 261a to 261d corresponding to the respective holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electrician holding area 231. According to the pending command reception history, It is stored in one of the unit storage areas 261a-261d. Specifically, when a pending command is received, the pending command information is sequentially stored in the order of the first unit storage area 261a→second unit storage area 261b→third unit storage area 261c→fourth unit storage area 261d. go. As a result, the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electrical holding area 231 in the RAM 204 of the main controller 101 and the unit storage areas 261a to 261d of the holding command information storage area 261 in the RAM 244 of the sound emission control device 102 are stored. be associated.

Further, the pending command information includes the type of the pending command, specifically information on whether it is a winning pending command or a losing pending command.

In the subsequent step S1402, a process for grasping the number of the first electric service counter C1 currently acquired in the first electric service holding area 231 is executed. Specifically, a process of incrementing by one the pending number storage area K provided in the pending command information storage area 261 of the RAM 244 is executed. The number-of-holds storage area K is for grasping the number of pieces of hold information to be subjected to various effects in the sound emission control device 102, specifically, the number of currently acquired first electric function counters C1. .

After executing the processing of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the game is in progress (the first unit area 71 is being displayed in a variable manner). It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is set in the in-game flag storage area 262 provided in the RAM 244 . The game in-progress flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable display in the first unit area 71. More specifically, it is set when a variation command is received, and an open command or a deviation variation end command is set. is a flag that is cleared when a

If the game is in progress, the pending command response process is terminated as it is, while if the game is not in progress, it is checked in step S1404 whether the first electric accessory 41a is open (supporting). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open flag is set in the open flag storage area 263 provided in the RAM 244 . The open flag is a flag that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is being opened. Specifically, it is a flag that is set when an open command is received and is erased when a close command is received. be.

When the first electric role product 41a is not open, while the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is, when the first electric role product 41a is open, time-saving hold notice in steps S1405 to S1415 Execute processing related to production.

First, in step S 1405 , it is determined whether or not a suspension notice flag is set in the suspension notice flag storage area 264 provided in the RAM 244 . The suspension notice flag is a flag that is set when a suspension notice performance is performed, and is a flag that is erased when a game cycle related to the suspension information that is not subject to the suspension notice performance is started.

If the suspension notice flag is set, it means that the suspension notice effect has already been performed. In this case, this pending command handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the suspension notice flag is not set, a process for starting the time saving suspension notice effect is executed in steps S1406 to S1414.

Specifically, first, a hold notice flag is set in step S1406. After that, in step S1407, the remaining open time of the first electric accessory 41a is grasped. Specifically, the RAM 244 is provided with a timer counter area 265, and the timer counter area 265 stores a timer counter T for grasping the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. The timer counter T is set to "3000" when the first electric accessory 41a is released, and is decremented by one each time the effect control process is started. Since the effect control process is started at a cycle of 2 msec, the timer counter T becomes "0" when 6 sec, which is the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a, has passed. In step S1407, by grasping the value of the timer counter T at the present time, the remaining open time from the present time to the closing of the first electric accessory 41a is grasped.

After that, in step S1408, a process of subtracting 1 from the pending number storage area K is executed. Then, in step S1409, the information stored in the first unit storage area 261a is stored in the execution area 261e provided in the RAM 244, and the information stored in the unit storage areas 261b to 261d is shifted. Let The data shift is the same as the data shift in the execution area AE of the first electrician reservation area 231 and each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4.

In the subsequent step S1410, win/fail information regarding the result of the support lottery is grasped among the information stored in the execution area 261e. Then, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current support lottery result is winning based on the grasped winning/failing information.

If the support lottery result is winning, it means that the next game round is the winning game round. In this case, the process advances to step S1412 to execute a process of selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time ascertained in step S1407. Specifically, a plurality of presentation times (for example, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, . One performance time corresponding to the remaining opening time is selected from among the plurality of performance times. More specifically, the maximum time is selected within a range shorter than the sum of the remaining open time and the winning game time of 0.5 sec, among the plurality of presentation times. For example, if the remaining open time is 1.7 sec, 2.0 sec is selected as the presentation time.

After that, in step S1413, the time-saving normal suspension notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1412 is started, and this suspension command handling process ends.

Specifically, the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 is provided with a various data table storage area 271, and the various data table storage area 271 stores a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to a plurality of types of effects. is set. In the data table, sound output patterns and light control patterns for effecting are set. In step S1413, the data table corresponding to the time-saving normal suspension notice effect is read out of the plurality of types of data tables.

Here, a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time-saving normal holding notice effect are prepared in advance so as to correspond to a plurality of effect times. In step S1413, out of the data tables corresponding to the plurality of types of time-saving normal pending notice effects, the data table corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1408 is read, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area. do. As a result, the effect of sound and light corresponding to the time-saving normal hold notice effect is started.

Furthermore, in step S1413, an effect command corresponding to the time saving normal holding notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes specific information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1412. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, it grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, display control of the pattern display device 81 is performed so that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the effect command and the effect time is performed on the display screen G.

Specifically, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a data table for displaying the variable display of decorative symbols on the display screen G. FIG. A plurality of types of data tables are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, and the variable display modes of the decorative symbols are different for each. When the display control device 212 receives the performance command corresponding to the time-saving normal suspension notice performance, it selects the one corresponding to the time-saving normal suspension notice performance among a plurality of types of data tables and corresponds to the present performance time. A data table is read, and a time-saving normal holding notice performance is started on a display screen G according to the read data table.

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the time-saving normal suspension notice effect will be described in detail. When the time-saving normal holding notice effect is started, the variable display of decorative patterns is started in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. After that, at the timing before the above-mentioned presentation time elapses, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and as a result of the stop, each of the effective lines L1 to L5. The combination of the decorative patterns that are detached upward is temporarily displayed in a slightly oscillating state. After that, at the timing when the performance time has passed, the combination of the detached decorative symbols is stopped (fixed) and displayed, and the time-saving normal suspension notice performance ends. As a result, the player can understand that the next game round is a winning game round, that is, the game will not shift to an advantageous state. The stop display of the combination of the outlier decorative patterns is maintained until a new performance is started.

In this case, it is configured to vary the variable display time of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the performance time. Specifically, in each data table that corresponds to the time-saving normal pending notice effect, so that the time from the temporary display of the decorative pattern to the stop display is constant regardless of each effect time, A period of time from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary display of the decorative pattern is set corresponding to each performance time. As a result, the time from the provisional display of the lost decorative pattern to the stop display is constant regardless of the performance time.

As for the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, any configuration is possible as long as the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the combination of the outlier decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the timing when the rendering time elapses. For example, it may be configured such that the combination of deviating decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the timing when the effect time elapses without being temporarily displayed.

Further, for example, first, high-speed fluctuation display (low discrimination fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern is started, and then low-speed fluctuation display (high discrimination fluctuation display) with a fluctuation display speed lower than that of the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. It may be configured to display or stop display. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the time during which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed among the two fluctuation displays so as to correspond to the remaining open time. As a result, it is possible to appropriately change the rendering time while reducing the sense of incongruity given to the player.

Further, the same applies to the variable display of decorative symbols in other effects described below.

On the other hand, if the support lottery result is a lost result, it means that the next game round is a lost game round. In this case, in step S1414, a process of selecting the rendering time corresponding to the remaining open time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, the maximum time within a range smaller than the remaining opening time is selected from among the plurality of presentation times. For example, if the remaining open time is 1.7 sec, 1.5 sec is selected as the presentation time.

After that, at step S1415, the time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected at step S1414 is selected, and this reservation command corresponding processing is ended. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the time saving advantageous holding notice effect. A plurality of types of each data table are prepared in advance so as to correspond to a plurality of rendering times. In step S1415, the data table corresponding to the presentation time selected this time is read in the sound emission control device 102, and the read data table is set in the presentation execution area.

Furthermore, in step S1415, an effect command corresponding to the time saving advantageous holding notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. - 特許庁The effect command includes specific information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1414. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, it grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, the data table corresponding to the present performance time is read out of a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time saving advantageous reservation notice performance, and the time saving advantageous reservation notice performance is started on the display screen G according to the read data table. .

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect will be described in detail. When the time-saving advantage holding notice effect is started, the variable display of decorative patterns is started in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. After that, at the timing before the timing of the elapse of the performance time, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and at least among the effective lines L1 to L5. A combination of jackpot decorative patterns is temporarily displayed on one effective line. After that, at the timing when the performance time has passed, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped (fixed) and displayed, and the time-saving advantage holding notice performance ends. Thereby, the player can grasp that the next game round is a losing game round, ie, the transition to an advantageous state.

According to this process, when the hold command information is acquired in a situation where the first electric accessory 41a is open and the hold notice effect is not executed, based on the acquired hold command information, time-saving normal A suspension notice effect or a time-saving advantage suspension notice effect is executed.

In this case, for the time-saving normal suspension notice effect, the remaining opening time of the first electric role product 41a and the time (winning game time) related to the game round after the opening of the first electric role object 41a are combined. , It is secured as the production time of the short-time normal suspension notice production. As a result, it is possible to secure a time longer than the time of the winning game as the performance time of the time-saving normal suspension notice performance, and to diversify the time-saving normal suspension notice performance.

On the other hand, for the time saving advantageous reservation notice effect, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the time saving advantageous reservation notice effect. As a result, even when the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game round (disappearing game round), it is possible to carry out the time-saving advantageous holding notice effect.

In addition, it is not limited to the above configuration, and at least a part of the remaining open time of the first electric accessory 41a can be secured as the production time of the time saving normal hold notice effect or the time saving advantageous hold notice effect. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of these pending notice effects, it is better to use the maximum remaining opening time.

Returning to description of production|presentation control processing (FIG. 25), in step S1303, it is determined whether the opening command is received. The open command is a command set when the first electric accessory 41a is opened, as already described. If an open command has been received, open command handling processing is executed in step S1304, and the process proceeds to step S1315.

The release command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, the timer counter T is set to "3000".

In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not pending command information stored in the pending command information storage area 261 exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending number storage area K is greater than or equal to "1". When the value of the pending number storage area K is "1" or more, the process of determining the pending notice effect according to the pending command information stored in the pending command information storage area 261 in steps S1503 to S1509 is performed. Run. In this case, the processing from step S1503 to step S1507 is the same as the processing from step S1406 and step S1408 to step S1411 in the pending command handling processing (FIG. 26), so description thereof will be omitted.

If the support lottery result of the holding information targeted for this holding notice effect is a winning result, that is, if the next game round is a winning game round, affirmative determination is made in step S1507, and normal holding notice effect is made in step S1508. to end this open command handling process. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the normal pending notice effect. In step S1508, the data table corresponding to the normal pending notice effect is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Also, in step S1508, an effect command corresponding to the normal pending notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. FIG. When the display control device 212 receives the performance command, it reads out the data table corresponding to the normal suspension notice performance from the program ROM 253, and starts the normal suspension notice performance on the display screen G according to the read data table.

In each data table corresponding to the normal pending notice effect, the time (6.5 sec) that is the combination of the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game time (0.5 sec) is set as the effect time. It is That is, the normal holding notice effect is performed over the release of the first electric accessory 41a based on a predetermined winning game round and the next game round (winning game round).

It should be noted that the specific mode of the display screen G in the normal suspension notice effect is the same as the time-saving normal suspension notice effect except that the variable display time of the decorative pattern is different, so the description is omitted.

On the other hand, if the support lottery result of the hold information to be the target of the hold notice effect of this time is a loss result, that is, if the next game round is a loss game round, a negative determination is made in step S1507, and advantageous hold is made in step S1509. The advance notice effect is started and the processing corresponding to this open command is ended. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effects. In step S1509, the data table corresponding to the advantageous reservation notice effect is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

In addition, in step S1509, an effect command corresponding to the advantageous holding notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, the data table corresponding to the advantageous reservation notice effect is read out from the program ROM 253, and the advantageous reservation notice effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table.

The opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a is set as the effect time in each data table corresponding to the advantageous reservation notice effect. That is, the advantageous holding notice effect is performed only during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game round.

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the advantageous hold notice effect is the same as that of the time-saving advantageous hold notice effect except that the variable display time of the decorative symbols is different, so the explanation is omitted.

According to this configuration, when the release of the first electric accessory 41a is started based on a predetermined winning game round in a situation where the pending command information related to the next game round is stored in the pending command information storage area 261, A pending notice effect (normal pending notice effect or advantageous pending notice effect) corresponding to the relevant pending command information (support lottery result) is executed. In this case, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game round is secured as the presentation time of the pending notice presentation. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the suspension notice effect.

That is, for the normal pending notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game time and the time of the next game time (winning game time) are secured as the effect time of the normal pending notice effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the normal hold notice effect by the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a.

On the other hand, for the advantageous reservation notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the advantageous reservation notice effect. As a result, even when the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game round (disappearing game round), it is possible to carry out the advantageous holding notice effect.

In particular, the production time of each suspension notice effect is longer than the production time of each time saving notice effect. For this reason, the diversification of the suspension notice effect can be achieved as compared with each time-saving suspension notice effect.

In addition, it is not limited to the above configuration, and it is sufficient if at least a part of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a can be secured as the performance time of each of the above-described suspension notice performances. For example, the production time of the normal pending notice production may be shorter than the time combined with the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game playing time. Also, the effect time of the advantageous reservation notice effect may be shorter than the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of each of the pending notice effects, it is better to secure the entire opening time of the first electric accessory 41a as the effect time.

Incidentally, when the value of the pending number storage area K is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S1504: NO), this open command handling process is terminated as it is. In this case, no new performance is performed until the time-shortening suspension notice performance is performed based on the acquisition of the suspension information related to the next game round, and the stop result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the previous game round continues to be displayed.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, a configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed while the first electric accessory 41a is being supported may be employed. In this case, when suspension information relating to the next game round is acquired during a predetermined performance, the performance may be switched so that a time-saving suspension notice performance is started instead of the predetermined performance.

As the predetermined effect, for example, the effect may be continuous with the time saving suspension notice effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when switching to the time-saving reservation notice effect.

Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if the open command is not received, the process proceeds to step S1305 to determine whether or not the variation command (winning variation command or loss variation command) is received. As already explained, the variation command is transmitted when the variation display of the normal symbols is started in the first unit area 71 . If a variation command has been received, variation command handling processing is executed in step S1306, and the flow advances to step S1315.

Variation command handling processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28 .

First, in step S1601, the type of variation command is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether the received variation command is a winning variation command or a losing variation command. Then, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is a winning command.

If it is a winning variation command, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not a pending notice flag is set.

If the pending notice flag is not set, based on the pending information (first electric role counter C1) that triggered the winning game round (winning variation command setting), the holding notice effect or the time saving notice effect is executed. means not In this case, in steps S1604 to S1606, processing relating to time-saving normal effect is executed.

Here, the holding notice effect or the time saving holding notice effect is obtained when the holding information related to the next game round is acquired before the opening (support) of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game round is completed. It is done in Therefore, a negative determination in step S1603 means that the winning game round this time is discontinuous with the opening of the first electric role product 41a, and the time-saving normal performance is the opening of the first electric role product 41a. It can be said that it is executed in discontinuous winning game rounds.

Concretely, the processing of step S1604 and step S1605 is first executed for the processing related to the time saving normal production. Since these processes are the same as those already explained, the explanation is omitted.

Then, in step S1606, the time-saving normal effect is started, and the process corresponding to this variation command is ended. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the time-saving normal effect. In step S1606, the data table corresponding to the time-saving normal production is read out from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the production execution area.

Moreover, in step S1606, the process which transmits the production|presentation command corresponding to time saving normal production|presentation with respect to the display control apparatus 212 is performed. The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 253 a data table for performing variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the time-saving normal effect on the display screen G based on the effect command, and reads out the data table. The time saving normal performance is started on the display screen G in accordance with.

A specific aspect of the display screen G in the time-saving normal production will be described in detail. When the time-saving normal effect is started, the decorative symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily hidden. Immediately after that, the combination of decorative patterns is temporarily displayed in a slightly swaying state on each of the effective lines L1 to L5. After that, at the timing when the performance time has passed, the combination of the deviating decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the time-saving normal performance ends.

Here, in each data table corresponding to the time-saving normal performance stored in the sound emission control device 102 and the display control device 212, the same time (0.5 sec) as the winning game time is set as the performance time. . That is, the time-saving normal production is an production performed over the winning game times.

On the other hand, when the suspension notice flag is set, it means that the normal suspension notice performance or the time-saving normal suspension notice performance is being performed. In this case, the process advances to step S1607 to clear the pending notice flag and end the variable command handling process.

That is, when the opening of the first electric role product 41a and the game round are continuous, during the opening of the first electric role product 41a, the holding notice effect or the time saving holding notice effect for the holding information of the next game round executed.

In this case, if the hold information (and hold command information corresponding thereto) has already been acquired at the opening timing of the first electric accessory 41a, the entire opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is the holding notice effect. It is secured as performance time. On the other hand, when the hold information is acquired while the first electric accessory 41a is open, the remaining open time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the performance time of the time saving suspension notice effect.

On the other hand, when the opening of the first electric role object 41a and the game round are discontinuous (excluding the lost game round and the winning game round) and the game round is the winning game round , The time-saving normal performance is performed over the winning game times.

On the other hand, if the received variation command is not a winning variation command (step S1602: NO determination), it means that a missing variation command has been received. In this case, in step S1608, the deviation display time is grasped from the specific information included in the deviation variation command.

Thereafter, in step S1609, processing for displaying the remaining advantageous time is executed. Specifically, as the remaining advantageous time, a specific command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in which the deviation fluctuation display time grasped in the previous step S1608 is set. The display control device 212 displays the deviation variable display time on the display screen G based on the reception of the specific command, and starts counting down the deviation variable display time. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with a count display timer counter for measuring time. The display control device 212 sets a value corresponding to the deviation display time in the count display timer counter based on the reception of the specific command, and updates the count display timer counter by subtracting 1 at a predetermined cycle. . This makes it possible to grasp the remaining advantageous time based on the count display timer counter. Then, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G is updated each time the count display timer counter is updated, or once every time a plurality of updates are performed.

After execution of the process of step S1609, in step S1610, the effect during the advantageous state is started, and the variable command corresponding process ends. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to effects during the advantageous state. In step S1610, the data table corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Further, in step S1610, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 253 a data table for displaying a series of movies corresponding to the effect in the advantageous state on the display screen G based on the effect command, and executes the data table according to the read data table. The above movie is reproduced on the display screen G.

For example, the playback time of the movie is set to 90 seconds, and the movie is played back repeatedly until the ending starts (until the advantageous state ends).

Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if the variation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined whether or not the count stop command is received. As already described, the count stop command is set when the support (opening/closing operation) of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started.

If the count stop command has been received, count stop processing is executed in step S1308, and the flow advances to step S1315. In the count stop processing, it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, and when the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, the remaining advantageous time is counted down. Execute the process to suspend the

Specifically, a process of transmitting the count stop command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 confirms that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down based on the reception of the count stop command. When it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down, updating of the count display timer counter is prohibited, and the remaining advantageous time at that time is blinked.

On the other hand, if the count stop command has not been received, the flow advances to step S1309 to determine whether or not the count restart command has been received. As already explained, the count restart command is set when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a ends.

If the count restart command has been received, count restart processing is executed in step S1310, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the count restart processing, it is confirmed on the display screen G that the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is suspended, and if the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is suspended, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is suspended. Execute the process to release the

Specifically, a process of transmitting the count restart command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. Upon receiving the count restart command, the display control device 212 cancels the prohibition of updating the count display timer counter, and lights up the remaining advantageous time.

According to such a configuration, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time, more specifically, the update of the count display timer counter is not performed while the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are being supported. As a result, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G can be synchronized with the loss fluctuation display time on the main controller 101 .

Further, not limited to the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the main control device 101 periodically transmits a command in which the information of the deviation display time is set to the display control device 212 via the sound emission control device 102 may be

Further, the display control device 212 may be provided with a real-time clock so that the time can be grasped by the real-time clock. In short, it is possible to grasp the deviation fluctuation display time, display the countdown of the deviation fluctuation display time, and stop the countdown display during the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. If so, its specific processing is arbitrary.

If the count restart command has not been received, the flow advances to step S1311 to determine whether or not the ending command has been received. As already explained, the ending command is a command that is set when the advantageous state ends.

If the ending command has been received, in step S1312 the ending is started and the process proceeds to step S1315. Specifically, data tables corresponding to endings are stored in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, respectively. In step S1312, the data table corresponding to the ending is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

Also, in step S1312, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the ending to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 253 the data table for displaying the ending movie corresponding to the ending on the display screen G based on the effect command, and displays the ending movie according to the read data table. Play back on screen G. The playback time of the ending movie is set to 2 seconds.

If the ending command has not been received, the process advances to step S1313 to determine whether it is the ending end timing. If it is the ending end timing, the process advances to step S1314 to execute pending notice effect determination processing, and the process advances to step S1315. In the pending notice effect determination process, the processes of steps S1503 to S1509 of the open command corresponding process (FIG. 27) are executed. As a result, when the hold command information related to the next game round is acquired, the hold advance notice effect is executed. The suspension notice effect corresponds to the suspension information that triggers the variable display in the first unit area 71 after the standby time has elapsed.

In step S1315, other processing is executed based on the reception of other commands. The other processing includes light emission control processing when a command related to each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 is received, setting and erasing processing of various flags such as a game running flag and an open flag. After executing the process of step S1315, this pending command handling process ends.

<Regarding the relationship between the flow of the game and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G>
Next, the relationship between the game flow and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

FIG. 29(a) shows winning to the first through gate 51, FIG. 29(b) shows the presence/absence of variable display of the first unit area 71, and FIG. 29(c) shows the support of the first electric accessory 41a. 29(d) shows the execution timing of the time-saving normal production, FIG. 29(e) shows the execution timing of the normal holding notice production, and FIG. 29(f) shows the execution timing of the time-saving advantageous holding notice production. , FIG. 29(g) shows the execution timing of the effect during the advantageous state, FIG. 29(h) shows the opening/closing mode of the second electric accessory 42a, and FIG. 29(i) shows the execution timing of the ending.

30A and 30B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at each timing. Specifically, FIG. (c) is timing t36, FIG. 30(d) is timing t37, FIG. 30(e) is timing t38, FIG. 30(f) is timing t39, and FIG. 30(g) is the display screen at timing t41. 4 shows a display mode of G. FIG. In FIGS. 30(e) to (g), the movie is actually played, but for convenience of explanation, the display of the image of the movie is omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 29(a), winning to the first through gate 51 occurs at timing t31 when the game is not in progress and the electric accessories 41a to 43a are not supported. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a game cycle (variation display of normal symbols in the first unit area 71) is started. This game round is a winning game round.

Further, at the timing of t31, since the electric accessories 41a to 43a are not supported because the game is not in progress, the winning game is started almost simultaneously with the winning of the first through gate 51.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pending command information and the winning variation command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 almost at the same time. In this case, the pending command handling process is performed before the variation command handling process.

Specifically, 1 is added to the pending number storage area K, and after the pending command information is stored in the first unit storage area 261a of the pending command information storage area 261, 1 is subtracted from the pending number storage area K, and The suspended command information received is stored in the execution area 261e. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(d), the time saving normal effect is started.

After that, at the timing of t32, the winning of the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric function counter C1 is obtained. As a result, the pending command is transmitted from the main controller 101 and the pending command information is stored in the pending command information storage area 261 . The first electric function counter C1 acquired this time corresponds to the winning value. That is, the next game round is the winning game round.

In addition, as already explained, when the hold command is received during the game cycle, the time saving hold notice effect is not executed (see step S1403 of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 26)). Therefore, the time-saving normal effect and the time-saving pending notice effect do not occur at the same time.

At the timing of t33, the winning game cycle ends and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started (see FIG. 29(c)). Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is released. In this case, a release command is transmitted and the release command handling process is executed. As a result, the next game round, more specifically, the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold command information acquired at the timing of t32, more specifically, the normal hold notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. , the variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, at the timing of t34 when the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a has passed, the support of the first electric accessory 41a ends. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a closes. Then, a game round based on the hold information acquired at the timing of t32, specifically, a winning game round is started. After that, at the timing of t35 when the winning fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 has passed, the winning game round ends, and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started.

Here, since the production time of the normal pending notice effect is set to the sum of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning fluctuation display time, the normal pending notice effect is performed at the timing of t35. finish. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the combination of the detached decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of t36, the winning of the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric function counter C1 is obtained. The first electric duty counter C1 corresponds to an outlier. Based on the acquisition of the first electric role counter C1, a hold command for the next game round is transmitted. In this case, since the first electric accessory 41a is open, a time-saving reservation notice effect, specifically, a time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The presentation time of the time-saving advantageous reservation notice presentation is set to a time slightly shorter than the remaining open time of the first electric accessory 41a.

After that, the time-saving advantage suspension notice effect ends at the timing of t37, which is the timing slightly before the timing of t38 when the first electric accessory 41a closes. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(d), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line (specifically, the right-downward line L4). As a result, it can be grasped that the state is shifted to an advantageous state, specifically, that the next game round is a lost game round.

Then, at the timing of t38, the first electric role product 41a is closed, and a game round is started.

According to this configuration, when the opening of the first electric role product 41a based on the predetermined winning game time and the next game time are consecutive, the opening time of the first electric role product 41a is used to open the next game time. A suspension notice effect related to is performed. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect time of the effect related to the game round longer than the game time, and it is possible to diversify the effect related to the game round.

Here, it is preferable to set the game playing time to be short in order to smoothly progress the game. In particular, in the present embodiment, since winning game rounds are played more frequently than losing game rounds, by setting the winning game round time to be shorter than the winning game round time, smooth progress of the game can be achieved. can. However, if the winning game round time is set short, the effects related to the game round performed on the display screen G, in detail, the types of the variable display modes of the decorative symbols are limited, and the degree of attention to the variable display of the decorative symbols is reduced. There is a risk of

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the effects related to the winning game round (various normal pending notice effects) are started during the support based on the winning game round executed at the timing before the winning game round. be. As a result, since the performance time for performing the performance related to the winning game round can be secured, the winning game cycle time can be shortened while ensuring the diversification of the performance related to the winning game round. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the winning game round while ensuring smooth progress of the game.

Also, at the timing of t38, a loss variation command is transmitted, and an effect during an advantageous state is started based on the loss variation command. Specifically, the movie is repeatedly played back on the display screen G. FIG.

Further, based on the start of the advantageous state effect, the display of the remaining advantageous time is started as shown in FIG. 30(e). The remaining advantageous time is counted down with the deviation display time as an initial value.

After that, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started at the timing of t39, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(f), the remaining advantageous time at the pause timing is blinking. For the sake of drawing, the blinking state is indicated by underlining.

Then, at the timing of t40, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a ends, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is restarted.

At the timing of t41, the game round ends. In this case, the countdown is completed, and as shown in FIG. 30(g), it is displayed that the remaining advantageous time is "0".

In addition, although illustration is omitted, at the timing of t41 (the end timing of the lost game round), the normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit area 72 . Therefore, the production during the advantageous state is continued as it is. Incidentally, the variable display of the normal symbols in the third unit area 73 is not performed.

After that, the support of the second electric accessory 42a based on the variable display of the normal symbols in the second unit area 72 is started, and when the support ends at the timing of t42, the advantageous state ends. In this case, the effect during the advantageous state ends, and the ending movie is reproduced.

Subsequently, when the ending movie ends at the timing of t43, the pending notice effect is started. The pending notice effect is based on the next game round, specifically based on the pending command information stored in the first unit storage area 261 a of the pending command information storage area 261 . Incidentally, when the next game round is the winning game round, the normal holding notice effect is executed.

Then, the waiting time elapses at the timing of t44, and the normal holding notice effect ends.

In other words, the waiting time (8 sec) is set to the sum of the ending effect time (2 sec) and the pending notice effect effect time (6 sec). As a result, during the standby time, it is possible to perform the ending and the suspension notice effect corresponding to the next game round for the lost game round.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not provide ending not only in the said structure, for example. As a result, the time between the missing game round and the next game round can be shortened. Therefore, the game can be progressed smoothly.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with a holding|maintenance advance notice production and performs a time-saving reservation notice production|presentation. As a result, it is possible to further shorten the time between the missing game round and the next game round. Further, instead of the holding notice effect, it may be configured to perform a time-saving normal effect in the next game time for the game time off. In this case, it is possible to omit the time required for the suspension notice effect, and to further shorten the time between the lost game round and the next game round. However, if attention is paid to the variety of effects related to the next game round with respect to the lost game round, it is preferable to set the time between the lost game round and the next game round longer.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Each unit area 71 to 73 is configured to be able to perform variable display independently, and when winning variable display ends in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 The variable display is reset, and then new variable display is prevented from starting in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which each support lottery is performed independently and each support lottery result is associated with each other.

In addition, when the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is completed, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit areas is temporarily stopped, and then the winning variation display related to the winning variation display The above count is restarted based on the termination of support. As a result, while utilizing the support lottery result and the variable display time until the suspension, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of support for another electric accessory during the support of one electric accessory.

Further, when the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends the change display, the counting of the change display time in the change display of the other unit areas is not suspended. As a result, attention can be drawn to the variable display of other unit areas, and the variable display of each unit area can be gradually focused.

Also, the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set shorter than the variation display times of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, and the loss variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set to be shorter than the second unit region 72. and set longer than the variable display time of the third unit area 73 . As a result, when winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the first electric accessory 41a is given priority over the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. On the other hand, when the deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is preferentially performed. there is Therefore, it is possible to determine which support is preferentially performed according to the variable display mode of the first unit area 71 .

By passing through each of the through gates 51 to 53, the unit regions 71 to 73 are configured to perform variable display of normal symbols independently, and furthermore, after passing through the first through gate 51, the second through gate. These positional relationships are set so as to pass through 52 or the third through gate 53 . As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 are displayed simultaneously.

In such a configuration, the control nail 64b is provided so that the game ball does not pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which only the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is displayed in a variable manner, and the simultaneous variable display can be preferably performed.

Furthermore, since the start timing of the variable display of the first unit region 71 is likely to be before the start timing of the variable display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73, the winning variable display of the first unit region 71 is , the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are likely to end earlier. Thereby, the support of the first electric accessory 41a can be prioritized over the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a.

During the support of the first electric accessory 41a, it is configured to perform a holding notice performance to notify whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, specifically to notify the result of the support lottery that triggered the next game round. As a result, since the effect time of the effect related to the game round can be secured longer than the game time, it is possible to diversify the effect for notifying the result of the support lottery.

In particular, if the game round time is shortened from the viewpoint of improving the game digestion rate, the effect time of the game round tends to be shortened. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to secure the effect time of the effect related to the game cycle longer than the game cycle time. can be achieved.

Further, when the game round is a winning game round, the first electric role product 41a is supported after the winning game round ends, and the first unit area 71 is supported during the support of the first electric role product 41a. The configuration is such that a new variable display is not started at . In this case, a time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a may inevitably occur between a predetermined game round and the next game round. In this configuration, the suspension notice effect is performed over the time related to the support and the game time, so that the time that can inevitably occur can be preferably used. As a result, it is possible to suitably utilize the time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a to perform the suspension notice effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the advantageous state is a state in which the deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the effect related to the game turn starts the deviation fluctuation display in the first unit area 71. must be started before the On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, various holding notice effects as effects related to game rounds are configured to be performed using the support time on the side ahead of the game round related to the holding information that is the target of the effects. It's becoming As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the game round before the loss variation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect related to the game cycle from becoming meaningless by performing the effect related to the game cycle after the transition to the advantageous state.

A second electronic combination winning port 42 and a third electronic combination winning port 43 are provided, and the frequency of winning both of them differs according to the shooting mode of the game ball. Specifically, the second electric role winning opening 42 and the third electric role winning opening 43 are arranged with a predetermined interval in the lateral direction. As a result, a game is played in which the shooting mode of the game ball is changed depending on which support is performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In such a configuration, the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are configured to be opened for a short time and then opened for a long time based on the start of support. As a result, the player can grasp the current support target by confirming that the opening has been performed for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the separate notification of the beating to the second electric combination winning opening 42 and the third electric combination winning opening 43 .

In particular, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is terminated based on the upper limit open time being the time that is the combination of the short-time opening and the long-time opening. In this case, since the opening for the split notification is short-time opening, it is possible to ensure a long opening time for long-time opening. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the separate notification by the electric accessary while securing the profit of the player.

In addition, when the result of the support lottery using the first electric role counter C1 is a losing result, the benefit provided to the player is increased. Specifically, when the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is performed, the support of the first electric role product 41a based on the winning variation display is the second electric role product 42a and the third electric role product 43a. The second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is supported while the first unit area 71 is being changed and displayed with priority over the support. Further, the support given to the player by the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a is greater than the support by the first electric role product 41a. This makes it possible to add surprise to the game.

In particular, the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 is the advantageous time, and the advantageous state ends when the advantageous time elapses. An attempt is made to generate support for the object 42a and the third electric accessory 43a more times. As a result, it is possible to arouse the gambling spirit of the player and increase the rate of completion of the game.

In addition, the deviation display time (advantageous time) of the first unit area 71 is configured to vary. As a result, the number of times of support for the second electric role product 42a and the third electric role product 43a in the first unit area 71 fluctuates. It is assumed that attention is paid to display times that fluctuate out of . Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the deviation display of the first unit area 71 .

In particular, the configuration is such that the display screen G displays the countdown of the deviation display time. This allows the player to easily grasp the remaining advantageous time.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the game board, the configuration related to the lottery, and the fluctuation start process are different. The different points will be explained below. In addition, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

First, the game board 300 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the game board 300, FIG. 31(b) is a schematic sectional view of the first variable winning device 301, and FIG. 31(c) is a schematic sectional view of the second variable winning device 302. FIG.

In the game board 300, a region defined as a game area is subjected to router processing in the same manner as in the first embodiment, thereby forming a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening includes a first variable winning device 301, a second variable winning device 302, an upper operation port 303 corresponding to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, a second through gate 52 in the first embodiment or a second A lower operating port 304 corresponding to the three through gates 53, a variable display unit 305, a main display section 306, and the like are provided. A nail 307 is provided in the game area.

When a ball enters the first variable winning device 301, the second variable winning device 302, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 304 (winning a prize), it is detected by a detection sensor ( not shown), and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper operating port 303 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 304, three prize balls are paid out and entered into the first variable winning device 301. When a ball is generated or when a ball enters the second variable winning device 302, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. may be different. Also, for example, the number of prize balls related to the second variable winning device 302 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 301, or the number of prize balls related to the second variable winning device 302 is greater than the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 301 The number of prize balls of both variable winning devices 301 and 302 may be different, such that the number of prize balls related to is large.

Both the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 are opened upward. Both working ports 303 and 304 are vertically aligned with the upper working port 303 facing upward. Each operating port 303 , 304 is arranged below the variable display unit 305 in the center of the game area. A guide peg 307a is provided to guide the game ball toward the operation openings 303 and 304 by colliding with the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27. As shown in FIG. In this case, depending on the arrival position of the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 in the upper part of the game area, there is no difference in the degree of expectation of winning to the operation holes 303 and 304 . In other words, it is not possible to target and shoot a game ball so that winning to one operating port occurs at a higher frequency than winning to the other operating port.

Here, the variable display unit 305 is provided with a center frame 305a, and the center frame 305a is provided with a stage 305b in which a guide passage 305c is formed. Both operating ports 303 and 304 are arranged below the outlet of the guide passage 305c. That is, from the top toward the bottom (towards the flowing direction of the game ball), the exit portion of the guide passage 305c, the upper operation opening 303, and the lower operation opening 304 are arranged in this order. As a result, the game ball drawn out from the exit of the guide passage 305c can easily enter the upper operation opening 303. As shown in FIG. Due to the guide path 305c, the winning frequency of the upper operating port 303 is higher than the winning frequency of the lower operating port 304.例文帳に追加

The main display portion 306 includes a first result display portion 306a for clearly indicating the internal lottery result performed based on the winning at the upper working port 303, and an internal drawing performed based on the winning at the lower working port 304. A second result display portion 306b is provided to clearly indicate the lottery result. In addition to the above result display portions 306a and 306b on the main display portion 306, when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the round game is set (or when the opening/closing execution mode is set), the round game in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. A round indicator may be provided to indicate the number of rounds.

In the first result display section 306a, the variable display of the specific pattern (specific pattern) is performed with the winning to the upper working port 303 as a trigger, and the variable display is stopped based on the winning to the upper working port 303. The result of the internal lottery that was decided is clearly indicated by the display. When the internal lottery result based on the winning to the upper operation port 303 is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the specific stop result is displayed in the first result display section 306a and the variable display is stopped. After that, it shifts to the first opening/closing execution mode.

In the second result display section 306b, the variable display of the pattern (specific pattern) is performed with the winning of the lower working port 304 as a trigger, and the result of stopping the variable display is based on the winning of the lower working port 304. The results of the internal lottery will be clearly displayed. When the internal lottery result based on the winning of the lower operation port 304 is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 306b displays the specific stop result and stops the variable display. After that, it shifts to the second opening/closing execution mode.

The main display unit 306 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as CRT, dot matrix and the like. In addition, the patterns variably displayed on the main display unit 306 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed. A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed is conceivable.

In addition, based on the winning to the upper operation port 303, the main display unit 306 and the pattern display device 81 start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. times.

A first holding lamp portion 311 corresponding to the first result display portion 306a is provided in the lower left area on the front side of the center frame 305a. The number of winning game balls in the upper operation port 303 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reservation lamp part 311. - 特許庁A second holding lamp section 312 corresponding to the second result display section 306b is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the center frame 305a. The number of winning game balls in the lower operation port 304 is reserved up to four at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting of the second reservation lamp part 312. - 特許庁

The first variable winning device 301 provided above the variable display unit 305 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is positioned on the back side of the game board 300 as shown in FIG. It has a first big winning opening 301a leading to the main winning opening 301a and a first opening/closing door 301b for opening and closing the first big winning opening 301a.

The first open/close door 301b is connected to a first variable prize winning drive unit 301c integrally provided as the first variable prize winning device 301 (connection locations are not shown). The first variable winning driving unit 301c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and based on the drive signal from the main control device 101, the first opening/closing door 301b is closed (closed) and open. (open state). Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and the game ball can win a prize when the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 303 wins the transition to the first opening/closing execution mode. It can be switched to an open state.

In addition, the first variable winning device 301 is formed with a first passing portion 301d at a position through which the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 301 through the first big winning port 301a must pass. A winning detection sensor 301e is provided so that the detection portion exists at the position of the first passage portion 301d. The winning game balls are individually detected by the first variable winning device 301 by the winning detection sensor 301e. The winning detection sensor 301 e is electrically connected to the main controller 101 , and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 301 e is output to the main controller 101 .

The second variable winning device 302 provided below the variable display unit 305 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is positioned on the back side of the game board 300 as shown in FIG. It has a second big winning opening 302a leading to the second big winning opening 302a and a second opening/closing door 302b for opening and closing the second big winning opening 302a.

The second opening/closing door 302b is connected to a second variable prize winning drive section 302c integrally provided as the second variable prize winning device 302 (connection portion is not shown). The second variable winning drive unit 302c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and based on the drive signal from the main control device 101, the second opening/closing door 302b is either closed or opened. place it. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and the game ball can win a prize when the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operation port 304 wins the transition to the second opening/closing execution mode. It can be switched to an open state. In other words, the variable winning device that performs the opening/closing operation differs between the first opening/closing execution mode and the second opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the second variable winning device 302 is formed with a second passing portion 302d at a position through which the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 302 through the second big winning port 302a must pass. A winning detection sensor 302e is provided so that the detection portion exists at the position of the second passing portion 302d. The winning game balls in the second variable winning device 302 are individually detected by the winning detection sensor 302e. The winning detection sensor 302 e is electrically connected to the main controller 101 , and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 302 e is output to the main controller 101 .

Here, it is configured so that no winning to the first variable winning device 301 occurs. Specifically, the game area is provided with a plurality of regulation pegs 307b that regulate the winning of the first variable winning device 301 . The control nail 307b is provided so as to cover the first big winning hole 301a from the base side of the game ball flowing direction, specifically from above, and the distance between the adjacent control nails 307b is the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than As a result, even if the first opening/closing door 301b is opened, no prize is awarded to the first big prize winning opening 301a.

<Construction of various counters>
Next, various counters used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 202 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display of the main display unit 306, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A random number counter C11, a jackpot type counter C12 used when judging jackpot types such as multi-round results and small round results with different round numbers, and a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. and a variation type counter CS for determining the deviation variation display time of the main display section 306 .

Each of the counters C11, C12, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230 . The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 321 consisting of a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, a first execution area AE1, and a second execution area AE2. In this reserved ball storage area 321, each value of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 is stored chronologically according to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 303 or the lower working port 304. It's like

Each area will be described in detail. The first reservation area Ra is a reservation area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operation port 303. In addition, the second reservation area Rb is a reservation area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and jackpot type counter C12 in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 304.

The first reservation area Ra is composed of four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4, and a first reservation number storage area RaN. The four memory areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 hold and store up to four winning histories of game balls into the upper opening 303 at maximum. Specifically, when the winning to the upper opening 303 occurs a plurality of times in a row, each numerical information is chronologically displayed in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. will be stored in

The first reserved number storage area RaN is a storage area for storing the number of used areas, that is, the number of game balls that have won and are reserved in the upper operation port 303 . Specifically, any numerical value of 0 to 4 is stored in the first reservation number storage area RaN, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the upper operation port 303 is reserved and stored. Know how many

The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra when starting the variable display of the first result display section 306a of the main display section 306, At the start of the variable display of the first result display section 306a, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

The second reserved area Rb is composed of four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4, and a second reserved number storage area RbN. Since these configurations are the same as those of the first reservation area Ra and the first reservation number storage area RaN, description thereof is omitted.

The second execution area AE2 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb when starting the variable display of the second result display portion 306b of the main display portion 306, At the start of the variable display of the second result display section 306b, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C11 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C11 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C11, and is periodically updated (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C11 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 321 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304.例文帳に追加More specifically, it is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303, and is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 304. .

Here, the winning value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined in advance. Specifically, two values are set as outliers, and a numerical value excluding these outliers is set as the winning value. That is, the winning result of the jackpot lottery is 598/600. Note that the value and number of outliers are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C12 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C12 is periodically updated, stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 303, and in the second holding area at the timing when the game ball enters the lower working port 304. Stored in Rb.

Here, in the present embodiment, a multi-round result and a small-round result, which differ in the number of times round games are played, are set as the jackpot types, and the jackpot type counter C12 distributes one of the above-mentioned round results. used for A round game is a game in which opening and closing operations of the variable winning devices 301 and 302 are performed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the round game, (A) the opening time of each large winning opening 301a, 302a becomes a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 10 sec), or (B) to each large winning opening 301a, 302a The number of winning prizes reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10).

Here, only the small round result is set as the jackpot type related to the shift to the second opening/closing execution mode, while the jackpot type related to the shift to the first opening/closing execution mode includes the multi-round result and the small round result. and are set. When shifting to the first opening/closing execution mode, the jackpot type counter C12 is used to distribute either the multi-round result or the small-round result.

The distribution destination of the jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the ROM 203 as a distribution table. The distribution table is a table set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C12 and the distribution destination are uniquely determined. Specifically, "0 to 28" of the jackpot type counter C12 corresponds to the small round result, and "29" corresponds to the multiple round result. It should be noted that the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 101>
Next, various processes executed by the main controller 101 in this embodiment will be described below.

Various processes in this embodiment are basically the same as in the first embodiment.

Specifically, in the timer interrupt process, when the winning to the upper operation port 303 is detected, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C11 and jackpot type counter C12, out of the free area of the first reservation area Ra Store for the first area. Then, the pending command information is set based on the obtained jackpot random number counter C11.

On the other hand, when winning to the lower operation port 304 is detected, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C11 and jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the first area among the empty areas of the second reservation area Rb. do.

In addition, in the normal process, based on the reservation information stored in the reservation areas Ra and Rb, the big winning lottery and the variable display of the specific symbols in the result display sections 306a and 306b of the main display section 306 are independently performed. let them do it. Incidentally, the jackpot lottery corresponds to the support lottery in the first embodiment, and the variable display of the specific symbols in the result display portions 306a and 306b corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbols in the unit areas 71 to 73 in the first embodiment. do.

Further, when the jackpot lottery result of the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is the winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a after the lapse of the variable display time. After ending the variable display, the switch is shifted to the first opening/closing execution mode. In the first opening/closing execution mode, the round game is executed only once or multiple times. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the first opening/closing execution mode this time is the small round result, the round game is executed only once. On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the first opening/closing execution mode this time is the multi-round result, the round game is executed only three times with a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 sec). . In the round game in the first opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing operation is executed for the first big winning hole 301a.

On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery result of the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b after the lapse of the variable display time. After ending the variable display, the switch is shifted to the second opening/closing execution mode. In the second opening/closing execution mode, the round game is executed only once. In the round game in the second opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing operation is executed for the second big winning opening 302a.

As already explained, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the first big winning hole 301a, the game ball cannot enter the first big winning hole 301a, while the game ball going to the open second big winning hole 302a is disabled. are allowed. For this reason, it is difficult to give a privilege to the player in the first opening/closing execution mode, while it is easy to give a privilege to the player in the second opening/closing execution mode. The first opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, and the second opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment. Respond to support.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display time for the first result display section 306a is measured based on the fact that the second opening/closing execution mode is performed (the winning variation display ends in the second result display section 306b). is paused, and upon completion of the second opening/closing execution mode, the measurement of the variable display time is resumed from the paused state.

On the other hand, based on the fact that the first opening/closing execution mode is performed (the winning variation display of the first result display section 306a ends), the variation display of the specific symbol in the second result display section 306b and the variation display are triggered. It is configured so as to reset the winning lottery result and not start a new variable display of the specific pattern until the first opening/closing execution mode is finished.

With these configurations, the playability shown in the first embodiment can be realized.

Here, in this embodiment, as already explained, the winning order to the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 is random. Even in this case, the winning variation display of the first result display section 306a based on the winning to the upper working port 303 precedes the losing variation display of the second result displaying section 306b based on the winning to the lower working port 304. It is configured so that it can be easily terminated immediately. A specific configuration thereof will be described below.

<First special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the first special figure fluctuation start processing executed in the first special figure correspondence processing related to the display control of the first result display section 306a will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33(a). The first special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the first special figure fluctuation start process is specified by the first result display unit 306a in the first special figure corresponding process. This is executed when it is specified to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, the first special figure fluctuation start process is not in each opening and closing execution mode, the first result display section 306a is not in the process of fluctuation display of the specific symbol, and the first result display section 306a shows the deviation result. It is executed when it is not in the middle and the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area Ra (RaN>0).

First, in step S1701, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the first reservation number storage area RaN is executed.

After that, in step S1702, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra for variable display is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

Then, the data stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the first reservation area Ra are shifted. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted to lower areas such as second area Ra2→first area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3.

In the subsequent step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the first execution area AE1 matches a predetermined outlier.

In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step S1703 is a big hit. In the case of winning the jackpot, in step S1705, the distribution determination of the type of jackpot is executed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C12 is grasped among the information stored in the first execution area AE1. Then, by referring to the distribution table, the player grasps the jackpot result corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C12 acquired this time. Specifically, it grasps which of the results of multiple rounds and the results of few rounds has been won.

In the subsequent step S1706, processing for setting the winning fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a is executed. Specifically, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 sec) is set as the win variation display time of the first result display section 306a. Specifically, the first variable display time counter Tx provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is set to "125". The first variable display time counter Tx is updated to be decremented by 1 when the first result display section 306a is in variable display in the first special figure corresponding process and not in the second opening/closing execution mode. As already explained, the first special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), so the first variation display time counter Tx is displayed in the first result display section 306a. is being performed, if it is not in the second opening/closing execution mode, the value is decremented by 1 every 4 msec period, which is the execution period of the normal process. The MPU 202 recognizes that the variable display time has elapsed based on the fact that the first variable display time counter Tx becomes "0", and executes processing for ending the variable display in the first result display section 306a.

After that, in step S1707, a winning variation command is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won, at step S1708, the loss fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a is determined. Specifically, by acquiring the current variation type counter CS and referring to the first table TD1 described in the first embodiment, the deviation variation display time is grasped.

The first table TD1, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 33(b), is a table in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the out-of-variation display time are associated with each other. In the first table TD1, as in the first embodiment, different deviation fluctuation display times are set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In step S1708, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS acquired by referring to the first table TD1 is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is transferred to the first fluctuation display time counter Tx. to set.

Thereafter, in step S1709, a deviation variation command including information for specifying the deviation variation display time is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, the variable display of the specific symbol is started in the first result display section 306a. And this 1st special figure fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Second Special Figure Fluctuation Start Processing>
Next, the second special figure fluctuation start processing executed in the second special figure correspondence processing related to the display control of the second result display section 306b will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 34(a). The second special figure corresponding process is executed once after the first special figure corresponding process is executed in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the second special figure fluctuation start process is performed in the second special figure corresponding process This is executed when the second result display section 306b specifies to start the variable display of the specific symbols. Specifically, the second special figure fluctuation start processing is not in each opening and closing execution mode, the second result display section 306b is not in the process of fluctuation display of the specific symbol, and the first result display section 306a shows the deviation result. It is executed when it is not in the middle and the reservation information is stored in the second reservation area Rb (RbN>0).

First, in step S1801, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the second reservation number storage area RbN is executed.

After that, in step S1802, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the second reservation area Rb for variable display is executed. Since the data setting process is the same as the data setting process of the first special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), the description is omitted.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the second execution area AE2 matches a predetermined outlier.

In the following step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step S1803 is a big hit. When the jackpot is won, the process of determining the variable display time of the second result display section 306b is executed in steps S1805 to S1807.

Here, the variable display time of the second result display section 306b is set differently according to the mode of the first result display section 306a. Specifically, the variation display time set when the deviation variation display is being performed in the first result display section 306a is set to be shorter than when it is not.

Specifically, first, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first result display section 306a is displaying the deviation variation. If the first result display section 306a is not displaying the deviation fluctuation display, the flow advances to step S1806 to execute normal fluctuation display time determination processing. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. By referring to the normal table TD11 stored in the variable display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the variable display time corresponding to the acquired variable type counter CS is grasped.

The normal table TD11 will be explained using the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34(b-1). The normal table TD11 is a table in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time of the second result display section 306b are associated with each other. In the normal table TD11, the variation display time is a time sufficiently longer than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first result display section 306a and the minimum deviation variation display time (30 sec) of the first result display section 306a. ) is set. Specifically, 3.0, 5.0, and 7.0 sec are set in the normal table TD11. In step S1806, by referring to the normal table TD11, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS is grasped from among the fluctuation display times. is set for the second variable display time counter Ty provided in the various counter areas 235 of .

The second variable display time counter Ty is updated to be decremented by 1 when the second result display section 306b is during variable display in the second special figure corresponding processing. As already explained, the second special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), so the second variation display time counter Ty is displayed as a variation in the second result display section 306b. is being performed, it is decremented by 1 every 4 msec cycle, which is the execution cycle of normal processing. The MPU 202 recognizes that the variable display time has elapsed based on the fact that the second variable display time counter Ty becomes "0", and executes processing for ending the variable display in the second result display section 306b.

On the other hand, if the first result display section 306a is in the process of displaying the deviation fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the time reduction fluctuation display time determination process is executed. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by referring to the time reduction table TD12 stored in the variable display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the variable display time corresponding to the acquired variable type counter CS is grasped.

The time saving table TD12 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34(b-2). The time saving table TD12 is a table in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time of the second result display section 306b are associated with each other. A plurality of types of time shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11 are set in the time saving table TD12. Specifically, 0.7, 1.0, and 1.3 sec are set in the time saving table TD12. In step S1807, by referring to the time saving table TD12, the time corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS among the above-mentioned each variation display time is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped variation display time is changed to the second variation. Set for the display time counter Ty.

Here, since the variable display time set in the time saving table TD12 is set to be shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11, the first result display section 306a is not displayed during the variable display. In some cases, the second result display section 306b displays a variable display that is shorter than usual.

Regarding the variable display time, if the minimum variable display time that can be selected in the normal variable display time determination process is set longer than the maximum variable display time that can be selected in the reduced time variable display time determination process, the specific The number of types of time and variable display time is arbitrary.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the average variation display time selected during the deviation variation display of the first result display section 306a may be set shorter than the average variation display time otherwise.

If the jackpot is not won, a negative determination is made in step S1804, and the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, a deviation fluctuation display time determination process is executed. The deviation variable display time determination process is the same as the normal variable display time determination process, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to set a different variable display time, for example.

After execution of the process of step S1806, step S1807 or step S1808, the variable display of a specific design is started in the 2nd result display part 306b in step S1809, and this 2nd special figure variation start process is complete|finished.

Incidentally, in the jackpot result based on the winning to the lower operation opening 304, the jackpot type is not provided. Therefore, the configuration related to the distribution determination is omitted.

<Regarding the flow of the game and the effect of each variation start process>
Next, a description will be given of the flow of the game according to the present embodiment and the effect of each variation start process.

First, a jackpot lottery is held based on the winning of the upper operation port 303 or the lower operation port 304, and the specific pattern changes corresponding to the jackpot lottery result in the first result display section 306a or the second result display section 306b. Display starts. The said jackpot lottery is almost winning. Then, when the variation display of the second result display section 306b is performed at the end timing of the winning variation display of the first result display section 306a, the variation display and the jackpot lottery result related thereto are reset (erased). be. Then, the first opening/closing execution mode is started based on the end of the winning variation display of the first result display section 306a, and the variation display of the second result display section 306b is not started until the first opening/closing execution mode is completed. After that, when the first opening/closing execution mode ends, the variable display of the second result display section 306b is newly started on the condition that the reservation information exists in the second reservation area Rb.

Here, the winning variation display time of the first result display section 306a is set shorter than the variation display time of the second result display section 306b. Therefore, the winning variation display in the first result display section 306a is likely to end before the end timing of the variation display in the second result display section 306b. Therefore, in a situation where the winning fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, the winning fluctuation display ends without being reset in the second result display section 306b, and the event of shifting to the second opening/closing execution mode is unlikely to occur. .

In particular, compared with the first embodiment, the variable display time of the second result display section 306b selected when the first result display section 306a is not in the losing variable display is the winning variable display of the first result display section 306a. It is set to be sufficiently larger than the time. As a result, in a situation where the first result display portion 306a does not display the deviation variation, the second result display portion 306b fluctuates regardless of the randomness of the winning timings for the upper operation opening 303 and the lower operation opening 304. Winning display of the first result display portion 306a is easily ended during the display.

On the other hand, when the deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, since the deviation fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a is set longer than the fluctuation display time of the second result display section 306b, The variable display of the second result display section 306b is likely to end during the deviation variable display. Then, when the winning variation display of the second result display section 306b ends, the mode shifts to the second opening/closing execution mode, and the counting of the variation display time of the loss variation display of the first result display section 306a is temporarily stopped. Then, during the second opening/closing execution mode, a round game (opening/closing operation of the second big winning hole 302a) is performed, and the game ball wins the second big winning hole 302a. As a result, a privilege is given to the player.

Then, at the end timing of the round game, when the loss fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, the fluctuation display based on the new hold information can be performed after the second opening/closing execution mode is finished. . In this case, when the variable display is winning variable display, the second opening/closing execution mode is started again based on the end of the winning variable display. As a result, the second opening/closing execution mode can be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the first result display section 306a is off and the variable display is being performed. That is, the state in which the first result display portion 306a is displaying the deviation fluctuation display is a state in which the second opening/closing execution mode is likely to be performed, and can be said to be an advantageous state for the player. The advantageous state is determined at least until the count of the deviation fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a becomes "0", specifically, the time during which the fluctuation display is performed in the second result display section 306b, and the 2 This is continued until the variable display time is reached after the sum of the time when no pending information exists in the pending area Rb.

Here, in the situation where the winning timing to the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 304 is random, the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is reset due to the end of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. In order to make it easier to win, it is preferable to set the variable display time of the second result display section 306b as longer as possible than the winning variable display of the first result display section 306a. However, if the variable display time of the second result display section 306b is lengthened, the interval for shifting to the second opening/closing execution mode in the situation where the first result display section 306a is off and the variable display is performed, that is, the second opening/closing execution of 1 Since the interval between the mode and the next second opening/closing execution mode becomes large, the smooth progress of the game is hindered, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the game during an advantageous state will decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the first result display section 306a is in the off-variable display, the variable display time of the second result display section 306b is set shorter than the normally selected variable display time. be. As a result, the intervals between the second opening/closing execution modes are shortened, so that the game can be smoothly progressed in an advantageous state.

<Production Control Processing and Open/Close Execution Command Corresponding Processing>
Next, the effect control processing in this embodiment will be described.

In the effect control process of this embodiment, instead of the process of step S1303 of the effect control process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution command has been received. The opening/closing execution command is a command that is set when shifting to the first opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game state transition process is executed between the first special figure corresponding process and the second special figure corresponding process in the normal process. In the first game state transition process, based on the end of the winning variation display in the first result display unit 306a, a process for transitioning to the first opening/closing execution mode is executed, and a process related to the round game, specifically , the processing related to the opening/closing control of the first big winning opening 301a is executed. The opening/closing execution command is set in the process of shifting to the first opening/closing execution mode in the first game state transition process. In the opening/closing execution command, information for specifying the type of the jackpot result that triggered the first opening/closing execution mode is set.

Also, in place of the processing of step S1304, processing corresponding to the opening/closing execution command is executed. The opening/closing execution command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of steps S1901 to S1905 is the same as the processing of steps S1502 to S1506 of the open command handling processing (FIG. 27), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, different types of pending notice effects are set in correspondence with the fact that two jackpot results with different numbers of rounds, which are the number of round games performed in the first opening/closing execution mode, are set. ing.

Specifically, in step S1906, the number of rounds in the current first opening/closing execution mode is grasped. Specifically, based on the information included in the opening/closing execution command received this time, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the first opening/closing execution mode this time is grasped. Then, the number of rounds corresponding to the type is grasped.

In subsequent step S1907, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds ascertained in step S1906 is multiple rounds (3 rounds). If it is not a multi-round, the process proceeds to step S1908, starts the suspension notice effect corresponding to the winning/failure information grasped in step S1905, and ends the main opening/closing execution command handling process.

On the other hand, in the case of multiple rounds, the process advances to step S1909 to start the ready-to-reach suspension notice effect corresponding to the success/failure information grasped in step S1905, and ends the main opening/closing execution command processing. In the ready-to-win reservation performance, after the ready-to-win display is performed as the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the winning/failure information is stopped and displayed.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) refers to a variable display state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display device 81 is started and before the stop result is derived and displayed, and the player is said to be in a variable display state that is likely to be in an advantageous state. A display state that makes you think

In other words, there is a possibility that a combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be realized by stopping displaying the decorative symbols for some of the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81. It is a display state in which a certain combination of ready-to-win decoration symbols is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win decoration with a possibility that a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols will be established is performed on a preset effective line within the display screen of the symbol display device 81. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination of patterns, and to perform variable display of decorative patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 8 will be described. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols having the same number on the lines L1 to L5, and in the state where the reach line is formed, the decorative symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 in a variable manner. By doing so, it becomes a reach display. Then, when an advantageous state occurs, specifically when the variable display related to the reach display is out of the variable display, the main pattern with the same number as the main pattern forming the reach line is the reach line. The variable display of the decorative symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated so as to be stopped and displayed upward.

In the ready-to-win display, while the combinations of ready-to-win decorative patterns are displayed as described above, the decorative patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. , or by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win decorative patterns. be

According to this configuration, when the hold information related to the next game round is obtained at the timing when the first opening/closing execution mode is started, the hold notice effect is executed for the hold information related to the next game round. be done. In this case, as the suspension notice effect, one of the normal suspension notice effect and the reach suspension notice effect is selected according to the mode of the first opening/closing execution mode.

Here, in the case of a multi-round result with a large number of rounds, the time required to complete the first open/close execution mode is longer than in the case of a small-round result. For this reason, it is possible to secure a long time for performing the suspension notice effect, and it is possible to suitably perform the ready-to-win display. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the pending advance notice effect, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the pending notice effect.

Note that, in the pending command handling process of the present embodiment, a process of grasping the remaining open/close execution mode time is executed instead of the remaining open time. Specifically, the MPU 202 of the main controller 101 sets current round information and remaining open time information (more specifically, numerical value information of a timer counter) when setting a pending command. Then, when the hold command is received, these information are stored, and the remaining opening/closing execution mode time is grasped based on the information.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

An upper operating port 303 and a lower operating port 304 are provided, and the first result display section 306a and the second result display section 306b are configured to independently perform variable display based on winnings to the respective operating ports 303 and 304. Then, when the winning variation display of the first result display section 306a ends, the variation display of the second result display section 306b is reset. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the determination result of win/fail determination based on the winning of the respective operation ports 303 and 304 is associated with each other.

Further, when the winning variation display of the second result display section 306b ends, the counting of the variation display time in the first result display section 306a is temporarily stopped, and then the second opening/closing execution mode related to the winning variation display is activated. The counting is restarted based on the completion of the counting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first opening/closing execution mode and the second opening/closing execution mode from occurring at the same time while utilizing the result of determination of whether or not the variable display subject to suspension is valid and the variable display time until the suspension is performed. be able to.

When the game ball is shot aiming at the lower working port 304, it is constructed so that the winning to the upper working port 303 can occur. As a result, it is possible to preferentially generate the winning to the lower operation opening 304 and suppress the act of making the game advantageous. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

That is, in order to prevent winning variation display from being performed in the first result display portion 306a and to allow winning variation display to be performed in the second result display portion 306b, winning to the upper operation port 303 is avoided. While doing so, it is conceivable to try to win a prize to the lower operation opening 304 . Specifically, it is conceivable to shoot the game ball so that the winning to the lower operating port 304 occurs preferentially over the winning to the upper operating port 303 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative positional relationship between the upper working opening 303 and the lower working opening 304 is set so that the lower working opening 304 alone cannot be hit. A configuration is provided to guide the game ball toward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in the benefits obtained depending on the player's skill, and the fairness of the game is ensured.

The variation display time of the second result display section 306b in the situation where the deviation variation display is performed in the first result display section 306a is longer than the variation display time in the situation where the deviation variation display is not performed in the first result display section 306a. was set short. As a result, while the frequency of occurrence of the second opening/closing execution mode is suppressed in a situation where the deviation variation display is not performed in the first result display section 306a, the deviation variation display is performed in the first result display section 306a. In some circumstances the interval between the second opening and closing execution modes can be shortened. Therefore, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening 301a and the second big prize opening 302a are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single big prize opening may be used. In this case, in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to set the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening so that the winning to the big winning opening does not occur or the winning frequency is lower than in the second opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, for example, a movable accessory is provided between a position where entry of a game ball into the big winning hole in the above 1 is restricted and a position where it is not restricted, and the accessory is moved based on the first opening/closing execution mode. The accessory may be arranged at the restricted position, and the accessory may be arranged at the non-regulated position when the second opening/closing execution mode is entered. In short, it is only necessary to restrict the winning of prizes to the large winning openings during the first opening/closing execution mode, and permit the winning of the large winning openings during the second opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds is changed to adjust the time during which the first open/close execution mode is set. A configuration may be adopted in which the time during which the first opening/closing execution mode is set is adjusted by making it different. However, when the upper limit opening time of the first big winning hole 301a per one round game is set to a specific time (for example, 30 sec), the time in the first opening/closing execution mode is within the range of the specific time. becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by executing a plurality of round games, it is possible to secure a period of time equal to or longer than the specific period of time as the period of time in which the first opening/closing execution mode is set. Diversification can be achieved.

Also, the winning probability of the big winning lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 303 and the winning probability of the big winning lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 304 may be different. In this case, by adjusting both, it is possible to adjust the frequency at which the first opening/closing execution mode is performed and the frequency at which the second opening/closing execution mode is performed, and it is possible to appropriately manage the game.

In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the lower operation opening 304 in the situation where the first result display section 306a is not in the state of fluctuation display is compared with the winning probability in the situation of the situation in which the first result display section 306a is not in the state of fluctuation display. can also be lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second opening/closing execution mode from being executed in a situation where the first result display section 306a is out and the variable display is not being performed, and it is possible to prevent unintended awarding of benefits.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the configuration of the lower working port 304 . The different points will be explained below.

A game board 400 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 400. FIG.

In the game area of the game board 400 of the present embodiment, an upper operating port 401 and a lower operating port 402 are provided, and a through gate 403 is provided. Also, in correspondence with the through gate 403, the decorative member 65 is provided with a display part 404 for an accessory, and the lower operation opening 402 is provided with an electric accessory 402a.

When the game ball passes through the through gate 403, a support lottery is carried out, and at the display part 404 for the accessory, variable display of normal symbols is carried out. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery is a winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the accessory display unit 404, and then the electric accessory 402a is supported (opening/closing operation).

When the electric accessory 402a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 304. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 402a is open, the game ball can enter the lower operation opening 304. configured to be Specifically, when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper operation opening 303 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. A relative positional relationship between the operating ports 401 and 402 is set. Then, when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, the electric accessory 402a is set such that the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper operation opening 303 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. is set. As a result, the electric accessory 402a is changed from the closed state to the open state, thereby allowing the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 304.例文帳に追加

According to such a configuration, the winning frequency to the lower operation opening 304 is different depending on the presence or absence of the support of the electric accessory 402a in the situation where the first result display section 306a is performing the deviation fluctuation display. Since the winning frequency affects the number of executions of the second opening/closing execution mode, it affects the benefits for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the through gate 403, the electric accessory 402a, and the accessory display section 404 in the second opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, it may be configured such that the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 304 is permitted in the situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state. The point is that the frequency of winning prizes to the lower operation opening 304 when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state is higher than that when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state.

Further, the center frame 305a of the variable display unit 305 is provided with a third holding lamp portion 405 that indicates the winning history of the through gate 403. FIG. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 403 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the third reservation lamp part 405.例文帳に追加

<Construction of various counters>
Next, various counters in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, an electric work counter C21 is provided as a counter for performing a support lottery based on winning a prize in the through gate 403, and an electric work counter C21 is used to store the electric work counter C21. A hand reservation area 411 is provided. The electrical service counter C21 and the electrical service reservation area 411 have the same configurations as the first electrical service counter C1 and the first electrical service reservation area 231 of the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 402a are mutually different. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation where game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 402a of the lower operation opening 402 is in an open state per unit time. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high and low.

The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different winning probabilities in the support lottery using the electric counter C21. Specifically, the winning probability of the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode is smaller than that in the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessary 402a is opened when the support is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the support lottery result is the winning result and the open state of the electric accessory 402a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the support interval from when a predetermined support is performed to when the next support is performed is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the variation display time of normal symbols performed in the character product display section 404 is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 402 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. When a prize is won in the lower operation opening 402, the mode can be shifted to the second opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player is likely to receive benefits.

<Electronic support processing>
The electric support processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal processing (FIG. 14), the electronic support processing is independent from the processing related to the variable display of the specific symbols in both the result display portions 306a and 306b based on the winning of the game ball into both the operation ports 401 and 402. is executed. In the electric role support process, the variable display of normal symbols on the accessory display unit 404 and the opening/closing operation control of the electric accessory 402a are performed.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 402a is being supported. If the electric role product 402a is not being supported, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed in the role product display unit 404.

When the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not there is pending information (electrical work counter C21) that has not yet become a lottery target for the support lottery in the electric work holding area 411.例文帳に追加

If there is no pending information that has not yet become a lottery target for the support lottery, the processing for supporting the main electric role is terminated as it is. It is determined whether or not the part 306a is displaying the deviation variation.

When the first result display portion 306a is not in the deviation display, the flow advances to step S2005 to execute normal symbol fluctuation start processing corresponding to the low frequency support mode, and end the main electric role support processing. Specifically, the support lottery is performed using the reservation information, and the process of determining the variable display time of the normal symbol is executed. Then, the variable display of normal symbols is started.

On the other hand, when the first result display unit 306a is in the process of losing fluctuation display, the process advances to step S2006 to execute normal symbol fluctuation start processing corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and end the main electric role support processing. do. Specifically, a support lottery is performed so that the winning probability is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and a variable display time shorter than the variable display time in the low-frequency support mode is determined. Then, the variable display of normal symbols is started. As a result, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is shortened.

When the variable display of normal symbols is in progress (step S2002: YES), a process for mid-variation is executed in step S2007. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has passed, and when it is determined that the variable display time has passed, a process of displaying the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is executed. Then, when the support lottery result is a winning result, a flag is set to specify that the support is being performed.

If it is being supported, an affirmative decision is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the first result display section 306a is displaying the deviation variation.

If the first result display unit 306a is not in the off-variation display, in step S2009, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and the main electric role support process ends. Specifically, a process for opening the electric accessory 402a only once for 0.2 sec is executed.

On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is in the middle of the deviation display, in step S2010, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the main electric role support process is executed. finish. Specifically, the operation of opening the electric accessory 402a for a longer time (for example, 0.4 sec) than the opening time in the low-frequency support mode is set as a unit operation, and a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.2 sec) is performed. Then, a process for performing the unit operation a plurality of times (for example, three times) is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the high-frequency support mode is set in the situation where the deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, and the deviation fluctuation display is displayed in the first result display section 306a. Low frequency support mode in a situation where it is not performed, specifically in a situation where variable display is not performed in the first result display section 306a and in a situation where winning variable display is performed in the first result display section 306a It was set. As a result, winning at the lower opening 304 is less likely to occur in a situation where the first result display portion 306a does not display the deviation variation, and thus the second opening/closing execution mode is less likely to be executed in that situation. On the other hand, when the first result display portion 306a is displaying the deviation fluctuation display, it becomes easier for the lower opening 304 to win a prize, so the frequency of execution of the second opening/closing execution mode can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set higher than that in the low-frequency support mode. good. In addition, in a configuration where multiple types of variable display times for normal symbols are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a short variable display time than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average variable display time is set to be shorter. may have been In short, the probability of winning the support lottery, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 402a are such that the frequency of winning the lower operation port 402 is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. At least one condition among the aspects may be made different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of the second result display section 306b may be set shorter than the winning variable display time of the first result display section 306a. Even in this case, if the first result display section 306a is not in the state of the fluctuation display, the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 402 is restricted by the electric accessory 402a, so the second opening/closing execution mode is less likely to occur.

Further, for example, the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 401 and the support of the electric accessory 402a may be synchronized. Specifically, when winning to the upper operation port 401 occurs in a situation where normal symbol winning variation is being displayed in the accessory display unit 404, the normal symbol winning variation display is immediately performed based on the winning. It is configured to end and start supporting the electric accessory 402a. As a result, the frequency of winning at the lower working port 402 after winning at the upper working port 401 tends to increase.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments.

(1) In the first embodiment, after the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71, the deviation result is displayed for a predetermined period of time. When the hold information is stored in the 1-delivery hold area 231, the configuration may be such that the next variable display based on the hold information is immediately started. In this case, even if the next variable display is the winning variable display, the winning variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 may end during the winning variable display. In other words, it can be said that the player is in an advantageous state even during the next fluctuation display after the loss fluctuation display. Then, when the next variable display is the winning variable display, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends based on the end of the winning variable display, and the advantageous state ends. do.

According to the above configuration, the loss variation display (loss game round) and the next variation display (next game round) are digested as a series of advantageous states. For example, when the losing variation display is performed continuously, each of these losing variation displays and the winning variation display after the losing variation display are digested as a series of advantageous states. As a result, it is possible to closely associate the preceding and following variable displays, and the smooth progress of the game can be achieved because there is no need to secure the display time of the deviation result.

In this case, in the display of the remaining advantageous time, for example, the remaining time of the failure variation display is displayed based on the start of the failure variation display. Then, a count of the deviation display time is performed, and when the count ends (when the remaining time becomes "0"), it is determined whether or not there is pending command information. If the pending command information does not exist, the ending is executed, while if the pending command information exists, it waits for a variation command to be received. Based on the variation command being received, the remaining advantage time is reset and counting resumes. The remaining advantageous time is set to 0.5 sec when the win variation command is received, and is set to the loss variation display time when the loss variation command is received. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the remaining advantageous time has been extended, so that it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the above configuration, the ending of 2 sec is executed after the winning game round is completed after the losing game round. Then, when the pending command information is set in the pending command information storage area 261, the time saving pending notice effect is set for the pending command information after the ending. As a result, while the first electric accessory 41a is being opened based on the winning variation display that triggered the termination of the advantageous state, the ending and the suspension notice effect relating to the next game round can be performed.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(2) In the first embodiment, the variation type counter CS at that time was not acquired based on the winning of the first through gate 51, but not limited to this, for example, based on each winning, at that time may be configured to acquire the variation type counter CS in . In this case, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first electric service holding area 231 together with the first electric service counter C1, and in the holding notice confirmation process, the first electric service counter C1 acquired this time is removed. If it corresponds to the value, it may be configured to determine the out-of-variation display time using the acquired variation type counter CS. In this case, a loss hold command including the loss fluctuation display time is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 . As a result, in the sound emission control device 102, based on the reception of the hold command, the first electric role counter C1 corresponding to the loss is acquired, and the loss fluctuation display time based on the first electric role counter C1 ( It is possible to grasp the out-of-game time).

In such a configuration, for example, when the same first electric combination counter C1 as the outlier is obtained continuously, both may be treated as one game turn in a pseudo manner. Specifically, for example, at a timing before the timing at which a predetermined lost game round is started, hold information (first electric role counter C1) related to the next game round is acquired, and the hold information is If it is the same as the outlier value, immediately after the end of the above-mentioned predetermined outlier game round, the next outlier game round is started.

In this case, the sound emission control device 102 determines whether or not the next game round is a losing game round in the processing relating to the start of the effect during the advantageous state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending command information related to the next game round has been acquired and the pending command information corresponds to the loss. Then, when it is confirmed that the next game round is a lost game round, the lost game round time of the next game round is grasped, and the lost game round time of this lost game round and the next lost game round The total time including the playing time is displayed on the display screen G, and the countdown is started. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if one game round with a long advantageous time is being played.

Furthermore, in a situation where a predetermined outlier game round is being performed, if the first electric role counter C1 related to the next game round and whose value is the same as the outlier value is acquired, the predetermined Immediately after the end of the missing game round, the next missing game round is started. Then, in the hold command handling process, the sound emission control device 102 determines whether the hold command received this time relates to the next game round and the next game round is a lost game round. It is determined whether or not the effect during the advantageous state is being executed. Then, when the above two determinations are affirmative, the lost game time corresponding to the hold command acquired this time is added to the current remaining advantageous time, and countdown is performed. As a result, it is possible to make it look as if the advantageous time has increased in the middle, and to increase the attention to the game during the advantageous state.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, two second through gates 52 and third through gates 53 are provided, and correspondingly, the second electronic role winning opening 42 and the second electric role item 42a, and the third electronic Although the role winning opening 43 and the third electric role item 43a are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which one through gate, electric role winning point and electric role item are provided may be employed. However, if attention is paid to the viewpoint of increasing attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball, it is preferable to provide two of each.

Also, for example, one through gate may be associated with a plurality of electric prize winning openings. In this case, if the support lottery result based on the winning of one through gate is a winning result, one of the plurality of electronic role winning openings is selected by internal lottery, and the selected electronic role winning opening is selected by internal lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which an electric accessary provided in the winning opening is operated to open and close.

In this case, it is not possible to visually determine which electric accessory will be opened/closed before the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory is performed. . As a result, it is possible to further increase the attention paid to the separate notification by the electric accessory.

(4) In the above-described first embodiment, the respective electric prize winning openings 41 to 43 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is based on the support lottery triggered by the winning of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 rather than the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory based on the support lottery triggered by the winning of the first through gate 51. It is preferable to set the opening/closing operation mode of the electric role object such that the degree of expectation for the game ball to enter is higher for the opening/closing operation of the electric role object. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of game balls paid out to the player in an advantageous state.

(5) In the first embodiment, the minimum variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set longer than the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71, but this is not the only option. The minimum variation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to be the same as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 . Even in this case, in the same processing times of normal processing, the first normal pattern fluctuation start processing is executed earlier than the second normal pattern fluctuation start processing and the third normal pattern fluctuation start processing, and the first unit area 71 Since the process related to the end of the variable display is executed before the process related to the end of the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 ends first. It will be done.

Further, the distance between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53 is set so that the distance for the game ball to fall requires 4 msec or more, without being limited to the configuration in which the processing order is set as described above. It is good also as a structure which sets.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, when the support lottery result based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is a losing result, it is configured to be in an advantageous state. If the support lottery result based on the winning is a winning result, the player may be in an advantageous state. For example, the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set longer than the variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, and the loss variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set to the second unit region 72. and shorter than the variable display time of the third unit area 73 . Then, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning variable display or the losing variable display in the first unit area 71 . In this case, the winning variation display (during the winning game) in the first unit area 71 is advantageous to the player.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(7) In the first embodiment, when the support for the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started while the first unit area 71 is being displayed with the deviation fluctuation, the deviation fluctuation of the first unit area 71 is performed. Although the counting of the display time is temporarily stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured not to be temporarily stopped. In this case, since the advantageous time can be treated as a fixed time, it is possible to facilitate game management and simplify the processing configuration.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(8) In the above-described first embodiment, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning game round. good too. In this case, if the support mode (opening/closing operation mode) of the second electric role product 42a and the third electric role product 43a during the winning game is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than that during the losing game. good. As a result, even if the support of the second electric role product 42a and the third electric role product 43a is started during the winning game round due to the non-resetting, the privilege given to the player is can be reduced, and an advantageous state can be secured.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(9) In the above-described first embodiment, upon completion of winning variable display of one of the variable displays of the unit areas 71 to 73, other variable displays may be reset. In this case, a lottery is separately carried out to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous state, and when the state is shifted to an advantageous state, the variable display time of the first unit region 71 in a predetermined number of game times is changed to the second unit region 72 and It is preferable to set the variable display time longer than that of the third unit area 73 . As a result, the player is in an advantageous state until the multiple game times are completed.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the suspension notice effect and the time-saving suspension notice effect are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if attention is paid to increasing the execution frequency of the effect, it is preferable to execute both the suspension notice effect and the time saving suspension notice effect.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the normal suspension notice effect (and the time saving normal suspension notice effect) is performed over the opening or the first opening/closing execution mode of the first electric role object 41a and the next game round. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be performed only during opening of the first electric accessory 41a or during the first opening/closing execution mode. In this case, since the difference in performance time between the normal pending notice effect and the advantageous pending notice effect is unlikely to occur, the result of the next round of the game is specified at the timing before the timing at which the stop result is displayed on the display screen G. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by

It should be noted that, if attention is paid to the point of diversification of the normal pending notice effect, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is executed during the next game round.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous holding notice effect is performed only during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a or during the first opening/closing execution mode. It may be configured to be performed across the opening or the first opening and closing execution mode and the subsequent off game round. In this case, the winning variation display time is secured as the presentation time of the advantageous holding notice presentation after the loss game round is started. Then, it is preferable that the effect during the advantageous state is executed based on the termination of the advantageous holding notice effect.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect (holding notice effect) related to the game round is executed using the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the front side for the game round and the time during which the game round is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the rear side of the game round may be used to execute an effect related to the game round. That is, it may be configured to execute the effect related to the winning game round across the winning game round and the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game round. In this case, the result of stopping the first unit area 71 and the opening/closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a are communicated to the player so that the result of the current game round is not grasped at a timing before the end timing of the effect. It should be difficult to understand.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the time between the winning game round and the next game round (the support time of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, the first opening and closing execution in the second and third embodiments Mode time) is a fixed time, but it is not limited to this and may be set as a variable time. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the winning to the first electric winning opening 41 is permitted. As a result, the support time varies according to the winning mode to the first electric winning opening 41 .

In such a configuration, it is preferable to change the effect mode of the pending notice effect according to the time between the winning game round and the next game round. Specifically, in the normal suspension notice effect and the time-saving normal suspension notice effect, it is preferable to temporarily display the combination of the winning decorative symbols based on the start of the next game cycle.

In the advantageous reservation notice effect and the time-saving advantage reservation notice effect, it is preferable to stop and display the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols based on the start of the next game cycle.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display screen G, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured not to display it. In this case, the player completes the game in the advantageous state while predicting when the advantageous state will end.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the advantageous time (outside fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71) is varied, but it may be configured not to be varied. This makes it possible to facilitate game management and simplify the processing configuration. However, if attention is paid to the point of increasing attention to the game, the variable configuration is superior.

(17) In the first embodiment, the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are set to have the same opening/closing mode. You may set so that an opening-and-closing mode may differ with the electric accessory 43a. In this case, it is preferable to set the opening and closing modes of both so that the degree of expectation for the game ball to enter is different. As a result, the player pays attention to which one of the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. further improvement can be achieved.

Also, the winning probability of the support lottery based on winning the second through gate 52 and the winning probability of the support lottery based on winning the third through gate 53 may be different. Even in this case, depending on whether the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53, the benefits given to the player differ. is generated, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, when the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 or the first result display section 306a ends, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 or the second result display section Although the variable display of 306b is configured to continue, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be reset. In this case, since the range of variation of the advantageous time can be reduced, it is possible to easily manage the game and to simplify the process for ending the advantageous state.

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, "0" is displayed as the count display of the remaining advantageous time based on the end of the deviation display of the first unit area 71. For example, the remaining advantageous time count display may be continued until the advantageous state ends. Specifically, at the end timing of the loss variation display (for example, after execution of the display of the loss result in the first unit region 71), whether the winning variation display is being performed in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 determine whether or not When winning variable display is in progress, the remaining variable display time is grasped based on the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3. In addition, when both are in the winning variation display, the remaining variation display time of the longer one is grasped. Then, a command including remaining variable display time information is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the sound emission control device 102 . The display control device 212 displays the remaining variable display time based on the reception of the command.

Further, the condition for ending the opening/closing operation may be displayed based on the elapse of the remaining fluctuation display time. Specifically, 6 sec is displayed as the upper limit open time, and 10 is displayed as the upper limit number. Then, the upper limit opening time and the upper limit number are counted. As a result, the timing at which the advantageous state ends can be easily grasped.

(20) According to the above-described first embodiment, in the situation where the holding information is not acquired in the first electric role holding area 231, both the variable display of the first unit area 71 and the opening/closing operation of the first electric role object 41a are performed. When the first electric duty counter C1 is acquired in a situation where is not performed, the deviation fluctuation display is performed immediately, but it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a time is provided and the opening performance is executed at the predetermined time.

(21) In the above-described first embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate support for the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning of the first through gate 51. However, this is not the only option. For example, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to light a specific lamp provided in the game area. In other words, the target of the lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is arbitrary.

Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the first electric accessory 41a is not provided. In this case, when the result of the lottery based on the winning of the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the winning result is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The variable display of the third unit area 73 is prevented from starting. As a result, the same game as in the first embodiment can be performed.

(22) In the above-described first embodiment, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without going through the first through gate 51, but this is the case. However, for example, a configuration in which the above phenomenon is likely to occur may be employed. In this case, the positional relationship of the through gates 51 to 53 and the position of the nail that guides the game ball are set so that the winning frequency to the through gates 51 to 53 does not change regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball. Good. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming to cause the winning of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 to take precedence over the winning of the first through gate 51, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game. can do.

(23) In the first embodiment, counting the variation display time in both winning variation display and losing variation display in the first unit area 71 based on the start of support for the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to suspend only in the case of loss fluctuation display, and not to suspend in the case of winning fluctuation display. In this case, the support for the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a may be ended based on the end of the winning variation display (the start of the support for the first electric accessory 41a).

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode are set in which the winning probability of the support lottery using the first electric counter C1 or the success/failure determination using the jackpot random number counter C11 is relatively high or low. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, the low-probability mode can be said to be an advantageous situation for the player, since the loss fluctuation display is more likely to be performed in the first unit area 71 or the first result display section 306a.

(25) In the first embodiment, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a may be changed. In this case, when the first electric accessory 41a is opened for a long time, the ready-to-win display described in the second embodiment may be performed.

Further, the opening/closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a may be configured such that the first electric accessory 41a is opened twice with an interval time in which the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the interval time is varied. As a result, it is possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the upper limit opening time as the presentation time of the pending notice presentation.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous time is displayed in a countdown format, but the display is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a countup format. In this case, it is preferable that the remaining advantageous time can be grasped by separately displaying the current loss fluctuation display time.

(27) In the first embodiment, when the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit areas is temporarily stopped. Although the counting is restarted based on the end of the support based on the winning variation display, the counting is not limited to this, and may not be restarted. In this case, for example, the variable display time may be reset based on the termination of the support, or the support related to the variable display subject to temporary suspension may be started immediately after the termination of the support. However, if attention is paid to the diversity of the game, the configuration of pausing is preferable.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, the process (destination specifying process) related to the setting of the hold command is immediately executed based on the acquisition of the hold information, but the present invention is not limited to this. The processing related to setting of the pending command may be executed based on the start of the support or the first open/close execution mode. Even in this case, the suspension notice effect can be executed. However, if it pays attention to the point which can perform a time saving reservation|reservation notice production, the structure which performs immediately based on having obtained the reservation information is better.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, each time hold information is acquired, a hold command based on the hold information is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102, and the sound emission control device 102 stores each time. , but not limited to this, for example, it may be configured to transmit only the hold command based on the hold information related to the next game round. Even in this case, various suspension notice effects can be executed, and the storage capacity of the RAM 244 can be reduced. However, considering the complication of the processing, it is better to store each time.

(30) In the first embodiment, when one of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is supported during an advantageous state, the other is not supported. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which both are supported may be used. As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, when the winning variation display of one unit area ends, the variation display of the other unit area is not temporarily stopped.

(31) In the first embodiment, the supporting lottery is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52. Any configuration may be employed as long as an operation (specific control) is performed. For example, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52, for example, a game ball may be paid out as a privilege of the same kind.

(32) In the first embodiment, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the variable display are triggered based on the end of the winning variable display of the first unit area 71. Although the support lottery result is reset, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the support lottery result may be reset. In this case, the variable display is ended without displaying the stop result after the variable display time has elapsed.

Further, based on the end of the winning variation display in the first unit area 71, part or all of the pending information stored in the second electrical holding area 232 and the third electrical holding area 233 is erased. may be configured.

(33) In the first embodiment, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 is a predetermined fixed time, but it is not limited to this and may be varied. In this case, it is preferable that the longest winning variation display time is set shorter than the shortest variation display times of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 . As a result, the playability described in each of the above embodiments can be realized.

Also, for example, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 (the average time when the winning variation display time varies) is calculated from the average time of the variation display times of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. may be set short.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 varies. In this case, the fixed time should be set so that the variable display in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 can be performed multiple times. However, if attention is focused on the degree of interest in the advantageous time and the variety of games, it is preferable to change the loss variation display time.

Furthermore, the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to a predetermined fixed time instead of being variable. In this case, each variable display time should be set so that the fixed time is longer than the winning variable display time of the first unit area 71 and shorter than the loss variable display time of the first unit area 71 .

In short, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display tends to end earlier than the variation display in the other unit areas 72 and 73. In the case where the deviating variable display is performed, each variable display time is set so that the variable display can be performed a plurality of times in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 during the deviating variable display. good.

The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, the second electric accessory 42a or the third Although the support of the electric accessory 43a (in the second embodiment, the second opening/closing execution mode) is configured to be performed multiple times, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured to end in one time. In this case, the game may be preferably managed by adjusting the degree of expectation of the game balls given based on one support or the winning probability of the support lottery (jackpot lottery in the second embodiment).

(35) Other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines that generate jackpots when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and pachinko machines equipped with other accessories. The present invention can also be applied to amusement machines such as a game machine such as an arrange ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display unit, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. Part of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. A part of the present invention can also be applied to a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses or the like as appropriate, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. First specific control (first embodiment support of the first electric accessory 41a, the first opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments), the first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments ), a second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments second lottery means (the function of executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the function of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) function to perform processing) and
with
The second specific control is a predetermined period ( What is performed when the winning variation display time of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the winning variation display time of the second result display section 306b in the second and third embodiments) has passed and
Disabling means for invalidating at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result of the second lottery means based on the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is the winning result (variation reset processing of MPU 202 A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to feature A1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. As a result, the player can simultaneously confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means.

In such a configuration, at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result of the second lottery means is invalidated based on the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a winning result. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the result of the lottery by the first lottery means while performing the two lottery means independently, and to provide a novel game in which the lottery modes of these lottery means are associated with each other. It becomes possible. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature A2. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display portion 306a in the second and third embodiments) to start the changing display of the pattern , the first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202;
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display portion different from the first display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit area 73 in the second and third embodiments) Second display control means (step S904 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
with
each of the display control means is capable of performing the changing display of the pattern on the other display part while the changing display of the pattern on one of the display parts is performed;
The invalidating means is configured to perform a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control on the first display unit in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on the second display unit. , The game machine according to feature A1, wherein the change display of the symbols performed in the second display unit and the lottery result that triggered the change display are invalidated.

According to the characteristic A2, the changing display of the pattern is performed independently in the first display section and the second display section. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display section or the second display section, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is performed during the changing display of the pattern on one of the display units can occur, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and more preferably improve the interest. can be planned.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the pattern performed on the second display unit and the change display are triggered. The lottery result will be invalidated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second specific control is not executed even though the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may be caused by invalidating the lottery results of the second lottery means.

Feature A3. The first display control means includes a first period determining means for determining a first changing display period, which is a period of changing display of the pattern on the first display section (processes in steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). and a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and 1709 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the pattern is displayed in the first display unit, the first period is determined changing display of the pattern in a predetermined changing display mode during the first changing display period determined by means;
The second display control means includes a second period determining means for determining a second changing display period, which is a period for changing display of the pattern on the second display section (processes in steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). and a function of executing the processing of steps S1806, 1808, and 1809 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the pattern is displayed in the second display unit, the second changing display of the pattern in a predetermined changing display mode during the second changing display period determined by the period determining means;
The first change display period when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result is set to be shorter than the second change display period,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is set to be longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized by:

According to the feature A3, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the pattern change display on the first display portion ends at a timing before the pattern change display on the second display portion ends. easy to do Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the pattern change display on the second display portion tends to end before the pattern change display on the first display portion ends. Thereby, the second specific control can be executed with priority over the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be varied according to the first change display period. Therefore, the changing display of the pattern on the first display unit and the specific control can be closely associated.

Feature A4. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first ball entry section (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operation openings 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) and a second entry section provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter a spherical portion (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments);
with
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the first ball entering section,
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the second ball entering section,
Characteristic A2, characterized in that it is configured so that a ball can enter the first ball-entering portion when a shooting operation is being performed aiming at entering the second ball-entering portion, or The game machine according to feature A3.

According to the feature A4, if a ball is aimed at entering the second ball-entering section, the ball may enter the first ball-entering section. As a result, by adjusting the shooting mode of the game ball, the act of intentionally causing the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control by giving priority to the changing display of the pattern of the second display unit over the changing display of the pattern of the first display unit. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game different from the game currently being played.

Feature A5. The first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are a first passing portion (first through gate 51) and a second passing portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. and
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
The game ball is arranged such that the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is lower than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. The game machine according to feature A4, further comprising flow-down mode control means (regulating nail 64b) for controlling the flow-down mode.

According to the feature A5, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. Thus, the lottery by the second lottery means is likely to be performed after the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. Therefore, the start timing of the pattern change display on the first display portion tends to be earlier than the start timing of the pattern change display on the second display portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the pattern change display on the first display portion ends during the pattern change display on the second display portion.

Feature A6. The first display control means is
Period determination means for determining the change display period, which is the period for the change display of the pattern on the first display unit (the function of executing the processing of steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in
Period measurement means for measuring the change display period determined by the period determination means (function for executing processing for updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments a function of updating the first fluctuation display time counter Tx);
with
When the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the period determining means,
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display part in a situation where the pattern is changed and displayed on the first display part, the change display period Temporary suspension means for temporarily suspending the measurement of (the function of executing the suspending process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the measurement of the variable display time related to the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) function).

According to feature A6, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display part in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on the first display part, the change display is performed. Since the measurement of the period is temporarily stopped, the player can execute the second specific control without worrying about the changing display of the symbols on the first display unit. As a result, it is possible to avoid the player's attention from being distracted during the second specific control, and to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

Moreover, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed, the lottery result by the first lottery means is not invalidated. As a result, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the relationship between the lottery result of the first lottery means and the lottery result of the second lottery means, and to diversify the games.

Feature A7. In a situation where the measurement of the change display period is suspended by the suspension means, the change display period is terminated based on the end of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result that triggered the suspension. Measurement resuming means for resuming measurement of the display period (function for executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, variation display related to the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments A gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized by comprising a function of restarting time measurement.

According to the characteristic A7, when the specific stop result is displayed, the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped, and then the change display period is determined based on the end of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result. Measurement resumes. As a result, it is possible to use the changed display of the symbols until the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the changed display.

Feature A8. When the second display unit displays a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control in a situation where the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit. (2) The game machine according to feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that the measurement of the change display period is not suspended.

According to the feature A8, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display portion in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on the first display portion, the pattern change display on the first display portion. is continuously performed, the first specific control can be executed. Thus, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, it is possible to gradually draw attention to the change display of symbols based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of symbols based on the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, both can be closely related.

Feature A9. said changing display period and said period determining means are respectively a first changing display period and first period determining means;
The second display control means includes a second period determination means for determining a second change display period, which is a period for the pattern change display on the second display section (processes in steps S1006 and S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). and a function of executing the processing of steps S1806 to S1808 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second period changing display of the pattern in a predetermined changing display mode during the second changing display period determined by the determining means;
Each period determination means is
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. to determine
Furthermore, when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the pattern on the second display portion is displayed while the pattern is changed on the first display portion. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or feature A8, wherein each change display period is determined so that the change display of can be performed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic A9, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the pattern change display on the first display portion ends before the pattern change display on the second display portion ends. easy to do Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the pattern change display on the second display portion may be performed multiple times during the pattern change display on the first display portion. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to add surprise to the game.

Feature A10. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the second electronic winning opening 42 or the third electronic winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments A second big prize opening 302a) in
Privilege granting means (function of controlling payout device 116 based on winning ball command in payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entering means;
When the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after being set to the open state (the second electronic control in the MPU 202 in the first embodiment is performed). a function of executing a winning combination opening/closing process and a third winning combination opening/closing process, and a function of performing opening/closing control of the second big winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments;
with
The number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, each period determining means changes each of the change display periods so that the first display unit The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the number of times of the pattern change display on the second display unit that can be performed during the pattern change display is changeable.

According to the feature A10, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during the second specific control of 1 is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive rewards from being given to the player, and it is possible to easily manage the game.

In such a configuration, since the number of times the symbols are changed and displayed on the second display portion while the symbols are displayed on the first display portion can be changed, by changing the number of times, the player can You can change the amount of benefits to be given by As a result, it is possible to change the privilege amount given to the player while easily managing the game.

Feature A11. The second period determining means determines that the changing display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit when the changing display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no pattern or when the change display of the symbols related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10.

According to the feature A11, when the first display portion displays the changing symbols related to the winning result, the relatively long second changing display period is likely to be determined. As a result, the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed is lengthened, so there may be an inconvenience that the game will not progress smoothly if the second specific control is continuously performed.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, when the first display portion displays the changed symbols related to the non-winning result, the relatively short second changed display period is likely to be determined. As a result, when the changing display of the symbols related to the result of non-winning is not performed on the first display section, the first specific control is executed with priority over the second specific control, and the above inconvenience can be avoided. can.

Feature A12. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable ball entry means (lower operation port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after being in the open state (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202);
with
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the ball entrance section,
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means,
Based on the change display of the symbols corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control on the first display unit, the variable input is displayed. From a low-expectation state (low-frequency support mode) in which the ball is expected to enter the ball means, to a high-expectation state (high-frequency support mode) in which the ball is expected to enter the variable ball means The game according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized by comprising means for shifting to support mode) (function for executing processing of steps S2005 and S2009 or steps S2006 and S2010 in MPU 202) machine.

According to the feature A12, based on the symbol change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result in the first display unit, the expectation of the ball entering the variable ball entering means is performed. degree increases. This facilitates the lottery by the second lottery means, so that the second specific control can be easily performed in the situation where the first display unit is displaying the changing symbols related to the result of non-winning. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the second specific control in a situation where the changing display of symbols related to the non-winning result is being performed on the first display section.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "as a unit mode when the variable entry control is performed once by the variable entry control means, the variable entry A high expectation state and a low expectation state are set so that the degree of expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the non-winning result is displayed in the first display section. It is conceivable that the mode of the variable ball-entering means is switched from the low-expectation mode to the high-expectation mode based on the change display of the symbols corresponding to the event.

Feature A13. the change display period, the period determination means, and the period measurement means are respectively a first change display period, the first period determination means, and the first period measurement means;
The second display control means is
a second period determining means (a function of executing steps S1006 and S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a second changing display period, which is a period of changing display of the pattern on the second display section;
A second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period determined by the second period determining means (executing a process of updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) function) and
with
When the changing display of the pattern is performed on the second display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the second period determining means,
Based on the third lottery opportunity (winning to the third through gate 53) different from each lottery opportunity, whether to execute the third specific control (support of the third electric accessory 43a) different from each specific control A third lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that performs a lottery as to whether or not
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, a third display section different from each of the display sections starts changing display of symbols, and a third display for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. Control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
with
The third display control means is
a third period determining means (a function of executing the process of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a third changing display period, which is the period for changing and displaying the pattern on the third display section;
a third period measuring means (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 in the first embodiment) for measuring the third change display period determined by the third period determining means;
with
when the changing display of the pattern is performed on the third display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the third period determining means,
The third display control means is capable of starting the changing display of the pattern on the third display portion during the changing display of the pattern on the first display portion or the second display portion,
The suspending means is
when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display part in a situation where the symbol changes are being displayed on each of the display parts, the first period measuring means and temporarily suspending the measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means;
when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display part in a situation where the pattern is displayed in the respective display parts, the first period measuring means; The game machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, wherein the measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means is temporarily stopped.

According to the feature A13, the lottery of the third lottery means and the symbol change display of the third display section are performed independently of other lotteries and symbol change displays.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display section or the third display section, measurement of the change display period on the other display sections is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the changing display of the symbols on the other display units. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control.

Further, according to the relationship with feature A7, when the specific stop result is displayed on one of the second display unit and the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period on the other display unit is temporarily stopped. Then, the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. As a result, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed.

Feature A14. Characteristic features A1 to A13, characterized in that regulation means for regulating the lottery by the second lottery means during the first specific control (such as a function of affirmatively determining the processing of step S901 or step S1201 of the MPU 202) is provided. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A14, since the lottery by the second lottery means is restricted during the first specific control, it is possible to avoid an event in which the first specific control and the second specific control are executed simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to avoid complication of the game caused by the provision of two lottery means and two specific controls, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Feature A15. The invalidating means does not invalidate the lottery result of the second lottery means when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, characterized by:

According to feature A15, when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery result of the second lottery means is not invalidated, so the second specific control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery by the second lottery means. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be made to pay attention step by step. Therefore, both can be closely related.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

According to feature A16, it is assumed that the player plays the game expecting that the lottery result of the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. As a result, unlike the conventional game in which the player is advantageous when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given a sense of surprise.

Feature A17. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electrical winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning opening in the second and third embodiments 301a) and a second variable ball entry means (the second electric winning prize opening 42 or the third electric winning winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (function of controlling payout device 116 based on winning ball command in payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each variable ball entering means;
with
In the first specific control, the opening and closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed,
In the second specific control, the opening and closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed,
The expectation of a ball entering the second variable ball-entering means under the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of a ball entering the first variable ball-entering means under the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized in that

According to feature A17, the expectation of a ball entering the second variable ball-entering means under the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of a ball entering the first variable ball-entering means under the first specific control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to give more benefits to the player. As a result, the state in which the second specific control is being performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being performed.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration "providing a restricting portion for restricting the ball from entering the first variable ball entering means" is conceivable.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, the following feature H1 The configuration limited in any one of to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. First specific control (first embodiment support of the first electric accessory 41a, the first opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments), the first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments ), a second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments second lottery means (the function of executing the processing of S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the processing of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) function) and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display portion 306a in the second and third embodiments) to start the change display of the pattern , the first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202;
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display portion different from the first display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit area 73 in the second and third embodiments) Second display control means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
with
The first display control means is
First period determination means for determining the first change display period, which is the pattern change display period in the first display section (the function of executing the processing of steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
First period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (function for executing processing to update the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, first change display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments function to update Tx);
with
When the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the first period determining means,
The second display control means is
Second period determination means for determining the second change display period, which is the pattern change display period in the second display section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1006 and S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of steps S1806 to S1808 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
Second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period (function for executing processing for updating the second timer counter T2 or third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of updating the second variable display time counter Ty of the MPU 202);
with
When the changing display of the pattern is performed on the second display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the second period determining means,
The second change based on the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control being displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on each of the display units. While the measurement of the display period is stopped, the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the changing display of the pattern is performed on each of the display units. A game machine characterized by comprising measurement stop means (a function of executing temporary stop processing and variation reset processing of the MPU 202) for stopping measurement of the first change display period based on the fact.

According to the feature B1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the symbol changes are displayed on the first display section and the second display section. Each is done independently. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display part or the second display part by the elapse of the change display period corresponding to each display part, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed can occur while the symbols are being changed and displayed on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide novel games and improve interest. can be done.

In such a configuration, when the pattern change display is performed on each display unit, when the specific stop result is displayed on one of the display units, the measurement of the change display period for the other display unit is stopped. . As a result, the player can execute the specific control based on the result of the specific stop without worrying about the changing display of the symbols on the other display unit. As a result, it is possible to avoid the player's attention from being distracted during the specific control, and to increase the degree of attention to the specific control.

Feature B2. The measurement stopping means detects that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display part in a situation where the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display part. a temporary stop means (a function of executing a temporary stop process of the MPU 202) for temporarily stopping the measurement of the first change display period based on the
measurement restarting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) for restarting the measurement of the first change display period based on the end of the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result; The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B2, when the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit, the measurement of the first change display period is temporarily stopped, and then the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result is terminated. Based on this, the measurement of the first change display period is resumed. As a result, it is possible to use the pattern change display until the game is temporarily stopped and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

Feature B3. When the second display unit displays a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control in a situation where the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit. , the gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that the measurement of the first change display period is not paused.

According to the characteristic B3, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display portion in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on the first display portion, the pattern change display on the first display portion. is continuously performed, the first specific control can be executed. Thus, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, it is possible to gradually draw attention to the change display of symbols based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of symbols based on the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, both can be closely related.

Feature B4. When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the period determining means may perform the changing display of the pattern on the second display portion a plurality of times during the changing display of the pattern on the first display portion. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein each change display period is determined as possible.

According to the feature B4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second display portion can perform the pattern change display a plurality of times during the pattern change display in the first display portion. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, while the lottery by each lottery means and the pattern change display on each display part are performed independently, a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means is continuously performed when a specific condition is established. As a result, it is possible to add surprise to the game.

Feature B5. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the second electronic winning opening 42 or the third electronic winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments A second big prize winning opening 302a) in
Privilege granting means (function of controlling payout device 116 based on winning ball command in payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entering means;
When the second specific control is executed, variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after being set to the open state (the first variable ball entry control means of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). a function of executing a second electric role opening/closing process and a third electric role opening/closing process, a function of performing opening/closing control of the second prize winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments;
with
The number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined,
When the specific condition is satisfied, the period determining means changes each of the changing display periods to change the second display section during the changing display of the pattern on the first display section. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the number of times the pattern is changed and displayed can be changed.

According to feature B5, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during the second specific control of 1 is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving excessive benefits, and the game can be easily managed.

In such a configuration, since the number of times the symbols are changed and displayed on the second display portion while the symbols are displayed on the first display portion can be changed, by changing the number of times, the player can You can change the amount of benefits to be given by As a result, it is possible to change the privilege amount given to the player while easily managing the game.

Feature B6. A third lottery means (step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute a third specific control different from each of the specific controls based on a third lottery opportunity different from each of the lottery opportunities function) and
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, a third display section different from each of the display sections starts changing display of symbols, and a third display for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. Control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
with
The third display control means is
a third period determining means (a function of executing the process of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a third changing display period, which is the period for changing and displaying the pattern on the third display section;
a third period measuring means for measuring the third change display period (function for updating the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
with
when the changing display of the pattern is performed on the third display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the third period determining means,
The third display control means is capable of starting the changing display of the pattern on the third display portion during the changing display of the pattern on the first display portion or the second display portion,
The suspending means is
when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display part in a situation where the symbol changes are being displayed on each of the display parts, the first period measuring means and temporarily suspending the measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means;
when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display part in a situation where the pattern is displayed in the respective display parts, the first period measuring means; temporarily suspending the measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means;
The measurement restarting means restarts the measurement of each of the change display periods temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

According to the feature B6, the lottery of the third lottery means and the symbol change display of the third display section are performed independently of other lotteries and symbol change displays.

In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display section or the third display section, measurement of the change display period on the other display sections is temporarily stopped. Then, the measurement is restarted when the specific control related to the specific stop result ends. As a result, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the changing display of the symbols on the other display units. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control.

Further, according to the relationship between the symbol change display on the second display portion and the symbol change display on the third display portion, when the specific stop result is displayed on one display portion, the change display on the other display portion The measurement of the period is suspended, and the measurement is resumed based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. As a result, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed.

Feature B7. The measurement stopping means detects that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display part in a situation where the change display of the pattern is performed on the second display part. Based on this, the change display of the pattern on the second display section is invalidated by invalidating the measurement of the second change display period, and furthermore, the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display is determined. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by comprising invalidation means for invalidating (a function of executing a variable reset process of the MPU 202).

According to feature B7, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the pattern performed on the second display unit and the trigger for the change display are performed. The lottery result of the second lottery means is invalidated. As a result, while the lottery by each lottery means and the symbol change display on each display part are independently performed, the lottery by the first lottery means and the pattern change display on the second display part are performed rather than the lottery by the second lottery means and the symbol change display on the second display part. It is possible to give priority to the changing display of the pattern in the first display section. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the changing display of symbols in each lottery means and each display section is performed independently, and the lottery results of these lottery means are associated with each other.

Feature B8. Each period determination means is
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. to determine
Furthermore, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is likely to be longer than the second change display period. The game machine according to feature B7, which determines a change display period.

According to feature B8, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the pattern change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the pattern change display on the second display unit ends. easy to do Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the pattern change display on the second display portion tends to end before the pattern change display on the first display portion ends. Thereby, the second specific control can be executed with priority over the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be varied according to the first change display period. Therefore, it is possible to closely associate the changing display of the symbols on the first display unit with the game state.

Feature B9. The second period determining means determines that the changing display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit when the changing display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no pattern or when the change display of the symbols related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to feature B8.

According to the characteristic B9, when the first display section displays the symbol change according to the winning result, the relatively long second change display period is likely to be determined. As a result, the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed is lengthened, which may cause a problem that the game will not progress smoothly. In particular, according to the configuration of feature B4, the second specific control can be continuously performed, so the above inconvenience tends to become noticeable.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, when the first display portion displays the changed symbols related to the non-winning result, the relatively short second changed display period is likely to be determined. As a result, when the changing display of the symbols related to the result of non-winning is not performed on the first display section, the first specific control is executed with priority over the second specific control, and the above inconvenience can be avoided. can.

Feature B10. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable ball entry means (lower operating port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after being in the open state (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202);
with
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the ball entrance section,
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means,
Based on the change display of the symbols corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control on the first display unit, the variable input is displayed. From a low-expectation state (low-frequency support mode) in which the expectation of ball entry into the ball means is relatively low, to a high-expectation state (high-frequency The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, further comprising means for shifting to a support mode (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2009 or steps S2006 and S2010 in the MPU 202).

According to the feature B10, based on the symbol change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result in the first display unit, the expectation of the ball entering the variable ball entering means is performed. degree increases. This facilitates the lottery by the second lottery means, so that the second specific control can be easily performed in a situation where the first display unit is displaying the changing symbols related to the result of non-winning. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the second specific control in a situation where the changing display of symbols related to the non-winning result is being performed on the first display section.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "as a unit mode when the variable entry control is performed once by the variable entry control means, the variable entry A high expectation state and a low expectation state are set so that the degree of expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the non-winning result is displayed in the first display section. It is conceivable that the mode of the variable ball-entering means is switched from the low-expectation mode to the high-expectation mode based on the change display of the symbols corresponding to the event.

Feature B11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching the game ball toward the game area where the game ball flows down;
A first ball entry section (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operation openings 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) and a second entry section provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter a spherical portion (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments);
with
The first lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the first ball entering section,
The second lottery opportunity is that the game ball enters the second ball entering section,
Characteristic features B7 to 7 characterized in that it is configured such that a ball can enter the first ball-entering portion when a shooting operation is performed aiming at entering the second ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of B10.

According to the feature B11, when aiming to enter the second ball-entering section, the ball may enter the first ball-entering section. As a result, by adjusting the shooting mode of the game ball, the act of intentionally causing the ball to enter the second ball-entering portion can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control by giving priority to the changing display of the pattern of the second display unit over the changing display of the pattern of the first display unit. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game different from the game currently being played.

Feature B12. The first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are a first passing portion (first through gate 51) and a second passing portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. and
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball is arranged so that the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is lower than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. The game machine according to feature B11, further comprising a flow mode regulation means (regulation nail 64b) that regulates the flow mode of the liquid.

According to the characteristic B12, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. As a result, the lottery by the second lottery means is likely to be performed after the lottery by the first lottery means is performed. Therefore, the start timing of the pattern change display on the first display portion tends to be earlier than the start timing of the pattern change display on the second display portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the pattern change display on the first display portion ends during the pattern change display on the second display portion.

Feature B13. It is characterized by comprising regulation means (a function of affirmatively judging the processing of step S901 or step S1201 of MPU 202) that regulates the execution of the change display of the pattern on the second display unit during the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12.

According to feature B13, since the execution of the changing display of the pattern on the second display unit is restricted during the first specific control, the first specific control can be performed without worrying about the changing display of the pattern on the second display unit. can be executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the player's attention from being distracted.

Feature B14. The invalidating means, when a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display part in a situation where the changing display of the pattern is performed on the second display part Any one of features B7 to B13, characterized in that the change display of the pattern on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are not invalidated. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature B14, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit, the pattern change display on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are displayed. Since it is not invalidated, the second specific control can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the change display of the pattern on the second display unit. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be made to pay attention step by step. Therefore, both can be closely related.

Feature B15. The gaming machine according to feature B14, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

According to the characteristic B15, it is assumed that the player plays the game expecting that the lottery result of the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. As a result, unlike the conventional game in which the player is advantageous when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given a sense of surprise.

Feature B16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electrical winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning opening in the second and third embodiments 301a) and a second variable ball entry means (the second electric winning prize opening 42 or the third electric winning winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (function of controlling payout device 116 based on winning ball command in payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each variable ball entering means;
with
In the first specific control, the opening and closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed,
In the second specific control, the opening and closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed,
The expectation of a ball entering the second variable ball-entering means under the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of a ball entering the first variable ball-entering means under the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature B15, characterized in that

According to feature B16, the expectation of a ball entering the second variable ball-entering means under the second specific control is set higher than the expectation of a ball entering the first variable ball-entering means under the first specific control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to give more benefits to the player. As a result, the state in which the second specific control is being performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being performed.

As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration "providing a restricting portion for restricting the ball from entering the first variable ball entering means" is conceivable.

Feature B17. First specific control (first embodiment support of the first electric accessory 41a, the first opening/closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments), the first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments ), a second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments second lottery means (the function of executing the processing of S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the processing of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) function) and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display portion 306a in the second and third embodiments) to start the change display of the pattern , the first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202;
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display portion different from the first display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit area 73 in the second and third embodiments) Second display control means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
with
The first display control means is
First period determination means for determining the first change display period, which is the pattern change display period in the first display section (the function of executing the processing of steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
First period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (function for executing processing to update the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, first change display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments function to update Tx);
with
When the changing display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit, the changing display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the first period determining means,
The first change display based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit while the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units. A game machine characterized by comprising measurement stopping means (a function of executing temporary stop processing and variation reset processing of the MPU 202) for stopping measurement of a period.

According to the feature B17, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the symbol changes are displayed on the first display section and the second display section. Each is done independently. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display part or the second display part by the elapse of the change display period corresponding to each display part, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed can occur while the symbols are being changed and displayed on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide novel games and improve interest. can be done.

In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period related to the first display unit is stopped based on the fact that the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit while the symbol change display is being performed on each display unit. . As a result, the player can execute the second specific control without worrying about the changing display of the symbols on the first display section. As a result, it is possible to avoid the player's attention from being distracted during the second specific control, and to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, the following feature H1 The configuration limited in any one of to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (the function of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment to execute the win-win process for through, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments a function to execute the winning process for the operating port);
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers (the first electrical work holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third a holding ball storage area 321) in form; and
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to preset added information, and a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. In the case, grant determination means that sequentially performs the grant determination for a plurality of special information (function to execute support lottery process of first normal figure fluctuation start process in MPU 202 of the first embodiment, second and third implementation a function of executing the processing of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the form);
The game state is shifted to a predetermined grant correspondence state based on that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. transition means (a function of executing the first electrical opening/closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of transitioning to the first opening/closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a game rotation operation is started, and corresponds to the determination result of the grant determination means. The action for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the action for game round as a notification result being regarded as one game round. Game turn control means (MPU 202 in step S505 to step A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
In a game machine equipped with
The game round control means, when a winning game round corresponding to the award correspondence result of the determination result of the grant determination means is performed, a grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state ( When the period in which the first electric accessory 41a is supported in the first embodiment and the period in which the first opening/closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments) have passed, the following is to start the game round of
Information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the grant determination is obtained before the next game round is started. Destination specifying means for specifying at the previous timing (function of executing confirmation processing for holding advance notice of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of executing processing of setting a hold command of MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the identification result by the destination identification means, a This game machine is characterized by comprising an effect executing means for performing a game-turn effect (a function of executing a normal holding notice effect and a time-saving normal holding notice effect in an MPU 242).

According to the feature C1, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the grant corresponding period corresponding to the grant corresponding state has passed after the winning game round is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress the start of a new game round during the provision corresponding state, and it is possible to suppress the player's attention from being distracted.

In this configuration, since the game round effect is executed across the grant corresponding period and the game round operation period, it is possible to secure a longer period than the game round operation period as the effect period of the game round effect. As a result, it is possible to set an effect that continues over a long period of time, which cannot be set within the game cycle operation period, as the game cycle effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance of the game cycle, and to improve the interest.

Feature C2. The effect execution means causes the predetermined display means (display screen G) to start the variable display of the pattern at least at a timing before the start timing of the next game round as the game round effect, and to perform the next game. Characteristic C1, characterized in that the stop result corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means is displayed at a timing later than the start timing of the round and by the end timing of the next game round. game machine.

According to the feature C2, the variable display of the pattern is performed over the grant corresponding period and the game cycle operation period. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the game round effect as a series of effects extending over the grant corresponding period and the game round action period.

Feature C3. When the special information related to the next game round is acquired at a timing before the end timing of the winning game round, the effect executing means sets the grant corresponding period corresponding to the winning game round. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the game round effect is executed based on the start.

According to the feature C3, when the special information related to the next game round has already been acquired at the end timing of the winning game round, the game round effect is executed from the start of the award corresponding period. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect period of the game round effect for the grant corresponding period.

Feature C4. When the special information related to the next game round is acquired during the provision corresponding period, the game round effect is completed by the end timing of the next game round from the acquisition timing of the special information. Provided with effect period determination means (function for executing the process of step S1412 in MPU 242) for determining the effect period according to the period until the end timing of the grant corresponding period,
The effect executing means executes the game round effect over the effect period determined by the effect period determining means when the special information relating to the next game round is acquired during the provision corresponding period. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, characterized in that

According to the feature C4, when the special information relating to the next game round is acquired during the provision corresponding period, the game round effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the game-turn effect, so that it is possible to further improve the degree of attention to the game during the award corresponding period.

In this case, the effect period is set so that the game round effect is completed by the end timing of the next game round. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game round effect ends at the timing after the end timing of the next game round and the game round effect affects the next game round effect.

Feature C5. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of being switched between an open state and a closed state (first electrical winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning opening 301a in the second and third embodiments) When,
a privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the winning ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means (the function of executing the first electrical opening/closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and a function of controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 301a of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment);
with
The grant correspondence period is either one of the following: the variable ball entry means is in the open state for a predetermined upper limit period, or game balls enter the variable ball entry means for a predetermined upper limit number. A specific game period in which a specific game is performed in which the variable ball entry control is continued until an event occurs,
Limiting means for limiting the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means so that the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number (first specific regulation nail in the first embodiment) 64c, the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, characterized in that it is provided with the control nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

According to the characteristic C5, it becomes a specific game period in which a specific game is played based on the end of the winning game round. The specific game ends when either the upper limit period elapses or the upper limit number of balls is entered. As a result, it is possible to adjust the amount of privilege given to the player, and it is possible to suitably manage the game.

In such a configuration, the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number. As a result, the specific game period corresponds only to the upper limit period without depending on the entry timing of the game ball, so that the performance period of the game round performance can be easily grasped. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the game round effect.

Feature C6. The grant correspondence period differs depending on the special information subject to the grant determination in the winning game round,
The effect executing means includes means for determining the effect period of the game round effect in correspondence with the provision corresponding period, and executes the game round effect over the effect period determined by the means. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that

According to the feature C6, the period corresponding to the provision is changed, and the effect period can be changed corresponding to the change. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game round effects.

In addition, according to the relationship with the characteristic C5, "the number of times the specific game is performed in the specific game period differs according to the special information that is the target of the grant determination in the winning game round, and the effect The executing means may be provided with means for determining the effect period of the game round effect corresponding to the number of times.

Feature C7. The winning probability that the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result is set higher than the non-winning probability that the determination result of the grant determination is a non-grant correspondence result that the determination result of the grant determination does not correspond to the grant information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by:

According to the feature C7, since the winning probability is set higher than the non-winning probability, the winning game round is more likely to be played than the game round corresponding to the non-granting result. As a result, it becomes easier for the provision corresponding period to occur continuously, so that it is possible to increase the chances of performing the game cycle effect.

Feature C8. The game according to feature C7, wherein the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set shorter than the operation period for the game round of the non-winning game round corresponding to the non-granting corresponding result. machine.

When the probability of winning is higher than the probability of non-winning, the frequency of occurrence of the award corresponding period becomes relatively high, so there is a possibility that the rate of completion of the game will decrease. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set relatively short, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the rate of completion of the game.

Further, even in this case, since the effect period of the game cycle effect can be secured for the duration corresponding to the provision, the diversification of the game cycle effect is ensured.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set shorter than the award corresponding period.

According to the feature C9, since the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set to be shorter than the award corresponding period, the degree of freedom in the award corresponding period is ensured while reducing the reduction in the rate of completion of the game round. can be done.

Further, even in this case, since the effect period of the game cycle effect can be secured for the duration corresponding to the provision, the diversification of the game cycle effect is ensured.

Feature C10. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (the function of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment to execute the win-win process for through, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments a function to execute the winning process for the operating port);
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined prescribed number as a plurality of numbers (the first electrical work holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third a holding ball storage area 321) in form; and
addition determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to preset added information, and a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the obtained information storage means. In the case, grant determination means that sequentially performs the grant determination for a plurality of special information (function to execute support lottery process of first normal figure fluctuation start process in MPU 202 of the first embodiment, second and third implementation a function of executing the processing of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the form);
The game state is shifted to a predetermined grant correspondence state based on that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. transition means (a function of executing the first electrical opening/closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of transitioning to the first opening/closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being made by the grant determination means, a game-playing operation is started and corresponds to the determination result of the grant determination means. The action for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the action for game round as a notification result being regarded as one game round. Game turn control means (MPU 202 in step S505 to step A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments performing display control of the first result display unit 306a);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round control means, when a winning game round corresponding to the award correspondence result determined by the grant determination means is performed, a grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state from the end timing of the winning game round When the period during which the first electric accessory 41a is supported in the first embodiment, and the period during which the first opening/closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments, the following is to start the game round of
Information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the grant determination is obtained before the next game round is started. Destination specifying means for specifying at the previous timing (function of executing confirmation processing for holding advance notice of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of executing processing of setting a hold command of MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the identification result by the destination identification means, at a predetermined timing of the award corresponding period after the end of the winning game round, a predetermined display means (display screen G) starts the variable display of the pattern, and the award. By displaying the stop result corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means by the end timing of the corresponding period or the end timing of the next game round, the determination result of the grant determination for the special information related to the next game round. A game machine characterized by comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing various pending notice effects in an MPU 242) for performing a game turn effect for informing of.

According to the feature C10, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the grant corresponding period corresponding to the grant corresponding state has passed after the winning game round is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress the start of a new game round during the provision corresponding state, and it is possible to suppress the player's attention from being distracted.

In such a configuration, the variable display of the pattern is started at a predetermined timing of the award corresponding period based on the winning game round. The variable display is performed until the end timing of the award corresponding period or the end timing of the next game cycle. Then, by displaying the stop result, the determination result of the provision determination for the special information relating to the next game round is notified. In this case, since the symbols are variably displayed using the grant corresponding period, the variably displayed symbols can be favorably performed even when the operation period for the game cycle is short. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the game cycle production, and to improve the interest.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, and the feature G1 to G4, and the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable ball entry means (the second electronic winning opening 42 and the third electronic winning opening 43 in the first embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Based on a predetermined specific trigger, variable ball entry control means (the second electronic device in MPU 202) executes variable ball entry control to switch the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means during a predetermined game period. a function of executing a role opening/closing process and a third role opening/closing process);
Privilege granting means (function of controlling payout device 116 based on winning ball command in payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entering means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means (second electric accessory 42a) and a second variable ball entry means (third electric accessory 43a) are provided,
The variable ball entry control means is
selection means for selecting one of the variable ball entry means for executing the variable ball entry control during the game period (a function of executing the second electric opening/closing process or the third electric opening/closing process in the MPU 202);
When one of the variable ball-entering means is selected by the selecting means, the variable ball-entering means is selected during the game period, and the expected degree of ball-entering to the variable ball-entering means is After operating in a relatively low low-expectation mode (short-time open), operate in a high-expectation mode (long-time open) with a relatively high expectation of ball entry into the variable ball-entering means. A gaming machine comprising mode determining means for determining a mode of the variable ball-entering means (a function of executing the second electric opening/closing process and the third electric opening/closing process in the MPU 202).

According to feature D1, variable ball entry control may be performed for the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means during a game period based on a specific trigger. As a result, it is possible to play a game while predicting which variable ball entry means will perform variable ball entry control during the game period. There is a risk that the player will be confused and the benefits that can be obtained will be reduced because the player does not know whether the variable ball entry control will be performed in the variable ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the variable ball-entering means selected by the selecting means during the game period operates in the low-expectation mode and then operates in the high-expectation mode. In this case, the player can easily grasp the variable ball entry control target based on the action of the low expectation mode, and place the game ball in the variable ball entry control target according to the action of the high expectation mode. It can be fired towards a ball means. As a result, it is possible to avoid the above-described inconvenience that may occur due to the provision of two variable ball entry means.

In particular, it is assumed that the player pays attention to each variable ball entry means during the game period. In this regard, according to this feature, the variable ball entry control target is notified by the variable ball entry means, which is the target of the player's attention. can be done.

In addition, since the mode of the variable ball entry means for letting the player grasp the variable ball entry control target is the low expectation mode, there is little influence on the game ball entry rate during the game period. As a result, while suppressing the influence on the ball-entering rate of the game ball during the game period, it is possible to notify the division of hitting by the variable ball-entering means.

Feature D2. The shooting means shoots a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein a specific period longer than the specific period is provided between the high expectation mode and the low expectation mode.

According to feature D2, since the specific period is set longer than the game ball shooting period, the game ball is shot at least once during the specific period. Thereby, based on the flow-down mode of the game ball shot during the specific period, it is possible to adjust the shooting mode of the game ball toward the variable ball-entering means for which the variable ball-entering control is performed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably divide the game balls during the specific period.

Feature D3. Each of the expectation degree modes is a long-term mode and a short-term mode in which the open period, which is the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state, is relatively long or short,
In the game period, the total period of the open period of the short-term mode and the open period of the long-term mode is a predetermined upper limit period, or the number of game balls entered based on the short-term mode and the length A specific game in which the variable ball entry control is continued until one of the following events occurs: The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is a game period.

According to the feature D3, the specific game ends when the period that is the sum of the open periods of both the short-term mode and the long-term mode becomes the upper limit period. In this case, since the mode for notifying the player of the current variable entry control object is the short-term mode, it is possible to ensure a long open period of the long-term mode. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the difference in hitting by the variable ball-entering means while securing the player's profit.

Feature D4. The shooting means shoots a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the open period of the short-term mode is set shorter than the specific period.

According to the feature D4, since the open period of the short-term mode is shorter than the specific cycle, even if the game ball is shot after confirming the operation of the short-term mode, the game ball will not be released during the short-term mode. It is unlikely that the ball will enter the variable entering means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the drop in the ball-entering rate during the specific game caused by performing the short-term mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of the player's profits that may occur due to the notification of the splitting by the variable ball entry means.

Feature D5. A shooting operation means (shooting handle 29) is provided for the shooting operation by the player, and a game ball is released from the shooting means toward the game area based on the shooting operation performed on the shooting operation means. is the configuration to be fired,
The shooting means shoots the game ball toward the first position in the game area when shooting the game ball based on the fact that the first predetermined operation is performed on the shooting operation means. In addition, when the game ball is shot based on the fact that the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation is performed on the shooting operation means, the second position different from the first position in the game area It shoots a game ball toward a position,
When the game ball is shot toward the first position by the shooting means and when the game ball is shot toward the second position by the shooting means, the variable entry with a high expectation of hitting the ball The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the positions of the variable ball-entering means in the game area are set so that the ball means are different.

According to feature D5, in order to obtain more benefits, there are cases where the game ball is aimed at entering the first variable ball entering means, and where the game ball is aimed at entering the second variable ball entering means. Therefore, it becomes necessary to change the mode of the firing operation for the firing operation means. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to which variable ball entry control is performed by which variable ball entry control.

Feature D6. A first lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform the variable ball entry control based on the first lottery opportunity (winning a prize to the first through gate 51);
Second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform the variable ball entry control based on a second lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53) different from the first lottery opportunity (a function of executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202);
with
The variable ball entry control means performs the variable ball entry control for the first variable ball entry means when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable ball entry control. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable ball entry control, the variable ball entry control is performed for the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

According to feature D6, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. As a result, the player can simultaneously confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means.

In this case, the variable entry control object to be controlled when the lottery result of each lottery means is a winning result differs depending on each lottery means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp which lottery means the variable ball entry control is based on. On the other hand, since the two lottery means are performed independently, it may be difficult to grasp which variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control.

On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the characteristic D1, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur due to the independent execution of the two lottery means.

Feature D7. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71) starts to display changing patterns, and displays a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function for executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73) different from the first display portion is caused to start the changing display of the pattern, and the second lottery means. Second display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of (MPU 202 step S904 ~ step S914 or step S1204 ~ step S1214 function to execute the process),
with
Each of the display control means is
When the change display of the pattern is performed, the period determination means for determining the change display period in which the change display of the design is performed (The function of executing the second normal pattern fluctuation start processing and the third normal pattern fluctuation start processing of the MPU 202 )When,
period measuring means for measuring the change display period (function for updating the second timer counter T2 and the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202);
with
In each of the display units, the pattern is changed and displayed in a predetermined changing display mode during the changing display period determined by the period determining means,
The variable ball entry control means controls the first variable ball entry control means based on the fact that a specific stop result corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is the winning result is displayed on the first display unit. The second variable ball entry means is controlled based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the second lottery means is the winning result is displayed on the second display unit. and
Each change display period is set to one of a plurality of periods with different periods,
When the specific stop result is displayed on one of the display portions while the pattern is being displayed in the respective display portions, the measurement of the change display period corresponding to the other display portion is temporarily stopped. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized by comprising temporary stop means (a function of executing temporary stop processing in the MPU 202).

According to the feature D7, the trigger for the change display of the pattern of each display unit is different, and each change display period fluctuates. there is As a result, it is difficult to grasp in which variable ball entry control the variable ball entry control is performed at a timing before the start timing of the variable ball entry control. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while predicting which variable ball entry means will perform variable ball entry control. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to grasp which of the variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, which may confuse the player and cause the inconvenience that the benefits obtained are reduced.

On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to provide a game in which the variable ball entry control target is predicted while reducing the decrease in the ball entry rate.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, and the feature G1 to G4, and the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the function of executing the processing of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
Transition means (first A function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display section 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Measurement means for measuring a predetermined advantageous time based on the occurrence of the advantageous state (the function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the first variation of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments function to update the display time counter Tx);
Advantageous state termination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S510 and S511 of the MPU 202) that terminates the advantageous state when the measurement means measures that the advantageous time has elapsed;
Measurement time notification control means (function for displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242) for notifying the time information corresponding to the measurement result by the measurement means by the notification means (symbol display device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, the advantageous state is established based on the determination result of the transition determining means being the transition response result. The advantageous state continues until the advantageous time elapses.

In such a configuration, the notification means notifies the time information corresponding to the measurement result of the advantageous time. As a result, during the advantageous state, it is possible to grasp the progress of the advantageous time directly linked to the player's profit, so that the degree of attention to the game during the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved. .

Feature E2. The reporting means is display means capable of displaying time,
Characteristic feature E1, characterized in that the measured time notification control means causes the display means to display the remaining advantageous time until the advantageous time elapses in the advantageous state based on the result of measurement by the measuring means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E2, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to easily grasp the remaining advantageous time.

Feature E3. a suspension means (a function of executing a suspension process of the MPU 202) that suspends the measurement of the advantageous time by the measurement means when a predetermined suspension condition is satisfied;
a measurement restarting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) that restarts the measurement of the advantageous time by the measuring means when a predetermined restart condition is satisfied;
with
The measured time notification control means is characterized in that, when the measurement by the measurement means is suspended, the notification of the time information at that time is suspended until the measurement by the measurement means is resumed. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

According to feature E3, when the suspension condition is satisfied, the measurement by the measuring means is suspended, and the suspension is maintained until the restart condition is satisfied. In this case, the notification of the time information by the notification means is also suspended in synchronization with the suspension. This makes it possible to synchronize the result of measurement by the measuring means and the notification of the time information in a situation where the measurement by the measuring means is temporarily stopped.

Feature E4. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the second electronic winning opening 42 or the third electronic winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments A second big prize winning opening 302a) in
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the winning ball command in the payout control device 117);
Opening/closing control means for controlling the variable ball-entering means so that the variable ball-entering means opens/closes in a predetermined operation mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (the second electromechanical opening/closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). and a function of executing the third electric opening and closing process, a function of performing opening and closing control of the second big winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
with
The advantageous state is a state in which the frequency of occurrence of the specific trigger is relatively high,
The temporary stop condition is that the opening and closing operation is started in the variable ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the restart condition is completion of the opening/closing operation of the variable ball-entering means.

According to the feature E4, the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means is performed in the advantageous state. As a result, the game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entering means, so that the player is more likely to receive a privilege, which is advantageous to the player.

In such a configuration, the measurement of the advantageous time is temporarily stopped while the opening/closing operation is performed in the variable ball-entering means. As a result, since the opening/closing operation of the variable ball-entering means and the update of the advantageous time do not occur at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted.

Feature E5. When it is measured that the advantageous time has passed by the measuring means, it is determined whether or not a predetermined extension condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the extension condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising extension means for extending the advantageous state by a predetermined extension time (a function of executing processing for dealing with the failure display of the MPU 202).

According to feature E5, when the extension condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is extended for a predetermined period of time. As a result, the advantageous state continues despite being notified by the notification means that the advantageous time has elapsed, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and whether or not the extension condition is satisfied. It is possible to reach the passage of advantageous time while being interested in.

Feature E6. A game-playing action is started based on the transition determination made by the transition-determining means, and the game-playing action is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means. , predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71, the second and third A first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment includes a game round control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the advantageous time is a time during which a winning game is played corresponding to the result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result.

According to the feature E6, since the advantageous time is the time during which the winning game round is performed, it is possible to provide a game in which the game round and the advantageous state are integrated. Thereby, interest improvement can be aimed at.

Feature E7. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (the function of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment to execute the win-win process for through, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments a function to execute the winning process for the operating port);
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined prescribed number as a plurality of numbers (the first electrical work holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third a holding ball storage area 321) in form; and
with
The transition determination means determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and stores a plurality of information stored in the acquired information storage means. when the special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information;
The game round control means is a time determining means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that determines a game round operating time, which is the time during which the game round is performed, based on the special information that is the determination target of the shift determining means. The first normal figure fluctuation start processing, the first special figure fluctuation start processing of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game round is performed, the game round determined by the time determination means The action for game play is performed in an action mode corresponding to the action time,
information of a judgment result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the transition judgment, and information for the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed; Destination specifying means for specifying the operating time information at the timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (the function of acquiring the variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for the reservation notice of the MPU 202 and the variation function to grasp the fluctuation display time based on the type counter CS),
The measurement time notification control means specifies that the game round next to the predetermined winning game round is the winning game round by the destination specifying means in a situation where the predetermined winning game round is started. In this case, time information corresponding to the time obtained by adding the operation time for the game round related to the winning game round on the rear side to the operation time for the game round related to the winning game round is reported. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by:

According to the feature E7, when the winning game rounds are continuously performed, the operation time for the game rounds related to the winning game rounds on the rear side is added to the operating time for the game rounds related to the winning game rounds on the front side. Information corresponding to the time is reported. As a result, the player can recognize the advantageous state of 2 as the advantageous state of 1 having a long advantageous time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game during the advantageous state, and to more preferably improve the interest.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features F1 to F4, and the feature G1 to G4, and the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the function of executing the processing of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
A setting means (first A function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display section 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player (a function of executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment; and a function of executing the processing of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment);
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to granting a privilege (a payout control device 117 controls a payout device 116 based on a prize ball command) function) and
with
The advantageous state is a state in which the lottery by the lottery means can be repeated multiple times,
A variable means for varying the duration of the advantageous state (a function of executing the processing of step S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1708 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A game machine characterized by

According to the feature F1, the advantageous state is established when the determination result of the transition determination means is the transition response result. A lottery may be conducted by the lottery means in the advantageous state, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning result, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, since the lottery by the lottery means may be repeatedly performed in the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player will make the lottery by the lottery means more often during the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game during the advantageous state, and to improve the interest.

In such a configuration, the number of times the lottery is performed by the lottery means fluctuates as the duration of the advantageous state fluctuates. As a result, the privilege given to the player in one advantageous state varies depending on the change in the duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the continuation period of the advantageous state, and it is possible to more preferably improve interest.

Feature F2. Measuring means for measuring the duration of the advantageous state (the function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the function of updating the first fluctuation display time counter Tx of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments )When,
Based on the lottery by the lottery means, the pattern changes in a predetermined display unit (second unit area 72 or third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments) Display control for performing each unit game according to the lottery of the lottery means, with the unit game of starting the display and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means when a predetermined change display period elapses. Means (Function of executing the processing of steps S904 to S914 or steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
with
The display control means, when a winning unit game corresponding to the winning result of the lottery means is performed, provides a grant corresponding period ( Support of the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments), the next unit for the winning unit game to start the game,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, further comprising: temporary stopping means for temporarily stopping the measurement by the measuring means during the award corresponding period (function for executing temporary stop processing in the MPU 202).

According to the feature F2, the measurement of the duration of the advantageous state is suspended during the grant correspondence period. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set the continuation period of the advantageous state and the change display period in consideration of the grant correspondence period. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the continuation period of the advantageous state and the change display period.

Feature F3. A game-playing action is started based on the transition determination made by the transition-determining means, and the game-playing action is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means. , predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71, the second and third A first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment includes a game round control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202),
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the continuation period of the advantageous state is a period during which winning game rounds corresponding to the result of the transition determination being the transition response result are performed.

According to the feature F3, since the duration of the advantageous state is the period during which the winning game round is performed, it is possible to provide a game in which the game round and the advantageous state are integrated. Thereby, interest improvement can be aimed at.

Feature F4. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (the function of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment to execute the win-win process for through, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments a function to execute the winning process for the operating port);
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined prescribed number as a plurality of numbers (the first electrical work holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third a holding ball storage area 321) in form; and
with
The transition determination means determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and stores a plurality of information stored in the acquired information storage means. When the special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information,
The game round control means is a period determination means (the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that determines a game round operation period during which the game round is performed, based on the special information subject to determination by the shift determination means. The first normal figure fluctuation start processing, the first special figure fluctuation start processing of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game round is performed, the game round determined by the period determination means The action for game play is performed in an action mode corresponding to the action period,
information of a judgment result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the transition judgment, and information for the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed; Destination specifying means for specifying the information of the operation period at the timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (the function of acquiring the variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for the reservation notice of the MPU 202 and the variation a function of grasping the variable display time based on the type counter CS);
In the situation where the predetermined winning game round is started, when the preceding identification means specifies that the game round next to the predetermined winning game round is the winning game round, the front side of the winning game round is specified. The information corresponding to the period obtained by adding the operation period for the game round related to the winning game round on the rear side to the operation period for the game round related to the winning game round is notified by a notification means (symbol display device 81). Means (function for displaying remaining advantageous time in MPU 242);
The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F4, when the winning game rounds are continuously performed, the operation period for the game rounds related to the winning game rounds on the rear side is added to the operation period for the game rounds related to the winning game rounds on the front side. Information corresponding to the period is reported. As a result, the player can recognize the advantageous state of 2 as the advantageous state of 1 having a longer duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game during the advantageous state, and to more preferably improve the interest.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the feature G1 below to G4, and the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area through which a game ball can pass;
Based on the gaming ball has passed through the first passing portion, first specific control execution means for executing a predetermined first specific control (function to execute the processing of step S202 ~ step S205 in MPU202),
Second specific control executing means (in MPU 202, step S207 to step S209 of step S207 to step S209 of function to execute processing, etc.) and
with
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball is arranged so that the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is lower than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a flow-down mode control means (regulating nail 64b) for controlling the flow-down mode.

According to the feature G1, the first passing section and the second passing section are provided, and each specific control is performed independently by passing through these. As a result, compared with the configuration in which one specific control is performed, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest.

In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, each specific control can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is positively generated simultaneously, and it is possible to more preferably improve interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion through the first passing portion, the second specific A situation in which only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which each specific control is positively generated simultaneously.

Feature G2. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area through which a game ball can pass;
A first lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion; ,
Second lottery means (in MPU 202, step S207 to step S209 , etc.) and
with
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
The game ball is arranged such that the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is lower than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a flow-down mode control means (regulating nail 64b) for controlling the flow-down mode.

According to the feature G2, the first passing section and the second passing section are provided, and by passing through these, the lottery is independently performed by each lottery means. As a result, compared with the configuration in which one lottery is performed, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest.

In such a configuration, a game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passing portion, so that the lottery by each lottery means can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each lottery is actively generated at the same time, and it is possible to more preferably improve interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion through the first passing portion, the second lottery It is possible to avoid a situation in which only a lottery by means is performed. As a result, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which the lottery by each lottery means is actively generated simultaneously.

Feature G3. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71) starts to display changing patterns, and displays a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function for executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73) different from the first display portion is caused to start the changing display of the pattern, and the second lottery means. Second display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of (MPU 202 step S904 ~ step S914 or step S1204 ~ step S1214 function to execute the process),
with
each of the display control means is capable of performing the changing display of the pattern on the other display part while the changing display of the pattern on one of the display parts is performed;
When the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display part in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the second display part, the second display part Disabling means (function for executing variation reset processing of MPU 202) for disabling the change display of the symbol performed in and the lottery result that triggered the change display,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol change display period of the first display unit is a variation display of the symbol of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized by being likely to be shorter than the period.

According to the characteristic G3, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently based on the game ball passing through the first passage portion or the second passage portion. Then, based on these lotteries, the symbol change display is performed independently on the first display unit and the second display unit, and when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit. , the first specific control or the second specific control is executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed can occur while the symbols are being changed and displayed on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and attract attention to the game. can be further enhanced.

Further, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed on the second display unit and the lottery that triggered the change display result is invalidated. This makes it possible to provide a novel game in which two specific controls are associated with each other.

Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the changing display period of the first display section tends to be shorter than the changing display period of the second display section. Since the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion is earlier than the timing at which the game ball passes through the second passage portion, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display portion is the same as that on the second display portion. It is likely that the timing will be earlier than Thus, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the pattern change display on the first display portion is likely to end earlier than the pattern change display on the second display portion. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the first specific control is more likely to be executed preferentially than the second specific control, while the pattern change display of each display section is performed independently.

Feature G4. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area through which a game ball can pass;
Based on the gaming ball has passed through the first passing portion, first specific control execution means for executing a predetermined first specific control (function to execute the processing of step S202 ~ step S205 in MPU202),
Second specific control executing means for executing a predetermined second specific control based on the game ball passing through the second passing portion (such as the function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) and ,
with
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball is arranged so that the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is lower than the frequency of passing through the first passing portion and passing through the second passing portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a flow-down mode control means (regulating nail 64b) for controlling the flow-down mode.

According to the feature G4, the first passing section and the second passing section are provided, and each specific control is performed independently by passing through these. As a result, compared with the configuration in which one specific control is performed, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest.

In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, each specific control can occur at the same time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is positively generated simultaneously, and it is possible to more preferably improve interest.

In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set smaller than the frequency of passing the game ball through the second passing portion through the first passing portion, the second specific A situation in which only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to preferably provide a game in which each specific control is positively generated simultaneously.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the feature F1 to F4, the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
When a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion (first electric winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, upper working openings 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area lottery means (first implementation A function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the form, a function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state, specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state (first electrical opening/closing process of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) and a function to shift the MPU 202 to the first opening/closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific state, advantageous state transition means (first implementation) for shifting the game state to an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the specific state The MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments has a function of executing the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71, and a function of executing the deviation fluctuation display of the first result display section 306a in the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H1, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result, the state is shifted to the specific state. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a non-winning result, the state is shifted to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state. As a result, the degree of advantage is opposite to that of the normal game mode, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and a novel game can be provided. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature H2. A first variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the first electrical winning opening 41 in the first embodiment, the first big winning opening in the second and third embodiments 301a);
A second variable ball entry means provided in the game area and having a higher expectation of a game ball entering than the first variable ball entry means when the same opening/closing operation as that of the first variable ball entry means is performed. (The second electric role winning opening 42 or the third electric winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
a privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege based on the entry of the game ball into each of the variable ball entering means;
A variable ball entry control that has selection means for selecting either one or both of the variable ball entry means, and switches the variable ball entry means selected by the selection means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means. Variable ball entry control means to be executed (the function of executing the second electric opening/closing process and the third electric opening/closing process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second big winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments function to control opening and closing) and
with
In the specific state, the variable ball entry control is set to be performed more easily with respect to the first variable ball entry means than with the second variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein in the advantageous state, the variable ball entry control is set to be easier to perform for the second variable ball entry means than for the first variable ball entry means.

According to feature H2, in an advantageous state, variable ball entry control is performed for the second variable ball entry means provided separately from the first variable ball entry means. The degree of expectation of ball entry to the second variable ball entry means is higher than the degree of expectation of ball entry to the first variable ball entry means. As a result, the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the specific state.

In particular, by separately providing the first variable ball-entering means and the second variable ball-entering means, it is possible to clearly distinguish between an advantageous state and a specific state. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp which state the player is in.

Feature H3. Regulating means (first specific A game machine according to feature H2, characterized in that it comprises a control nail 64c, and a control nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

According to the feature H3, the restricting means physically restricts the entry of the ball into the first variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to vary the ball-entering expectation to each variable-ball-entering means without complicating the opening/closing operation mode of each variable-ball-entering means. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of the feature H2 with a simple configuration, compared to a configuration in which a configuration relating to setting of the opening/closing operation mode of each variable ball-entering means is provided.

Feature H4. The lottery means is a first lottery means for performing lottery as to whether or not to generate the specific state based on a first lottery opportunity,
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments ), the granting correspondence state (support of the second electric role product 42a or the third electric role product 43a in the first embodiment, the second and third A second lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) that determines whether or not to generate the second opening/closing execution mode). a function of executing the process of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display portion (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display portion 306a in the second and third embodiments) to start the change display of the pattern , the first display control means for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202;
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display portion different from the first display portion (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit area 73 in the second and third embodiments) Second display control means (step S904 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
with
each of the display control means is capable of performing the changing display of the pattern on the other display part while the changing display of the pattern on one of the display parts is performed;
When the specific stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state is displayed on the first display part in a situation where the pattern change display is performed on the second display part, the second display part displays: invalidation means (function for executing variation reset processing of MPU 202) for invalidating the changing display of the pattern and the lottery result that triggered the changing display,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the pattern change display period of the first display unit is set to be shorter than the pattern change display period of the second display unit. cage,
The advantageous state transition means, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the non-winning result, keeps the first display unit for a period longer than the pattern change display period of the second display unit. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, further comprising means for facilitating the changing display of the symbols.

According to the feature H4, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the symbol changes are displayed on the first display section and the second display section. Each is done independently. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display section or the second display section, the state shifts to the specific state or the provision corresponding state. As a result, an event of shifting to a specific state or a grant corresponding state can occur during the display of changing patterns on one display unit, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and increase the degree of attention to the game. can.

In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the pattern change display on the first display portion is likely to end before the end timing of the pattern change display on the second display portion. . Thereby, the game state is more likely to be in the specific state than in the grant corresponding state.

On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the pattern change display on the second display portion tends to end before the pattern change display on the first display portion ends. As a result, the game state is more likely to be the grant corresponding state than the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the feature F1 to F4, the configuration limited by any one of the features G1 to G4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 27... Game ball launching mechanism 33... Game board 41-43... Electric prize-winning opening 41a-43a... Electric accessary item 51-53... Through gate 62... Accessory display unit 64b Control nail 64c First specific control nail 64d Second specific control nail 64e Strike guide nail 71 to 73 Unit area 81 Design display device 101 Main control device 102 Sound emission control Device 202 MPU of main control device 101 242 MPU of sound emission control device 102 300 Game board in the second embodiment 301 First variable winning device 302 Second variable winning device 303 Above Operation opening 304...Lower operation opening 306...Main display section 306a...First result display section 306b...Second result display section 400...Game board in the third embodiment 401...Upper operation opening 402...Lower Operation port 402a...Electric accessory 403...Through gate 404...Accessory display unit.

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means for a predetermined game period based on a predetermined specific trigger;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first variable ball-entering means and a second variable ball-entering means are provided as the variable ball-entering means,
The variable ball entry control means is
selection means for selecting one of the variable ball entry means that executes the variable ball entry control during the game period;
When one of the variable ball-entering means is selected by the selecting means, the variable ball-entering means is selected during the game period, and the expected degree of ball-entering to the variable ball-entering means is The mode of the variable ball-entering means is determined such that after operating in a relatively low low-expectation mode, the variable ball-entering means operates in a high-expectation mode with a relatively high expectation of ball entry into the variable ball-entering means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising mode determining means.

Images